Efjohnson Smartzone 7780 Users Manual Book.bk

EFJohnson Radio FM Portable Radio Intrinsically-Safe SMARTNET, SmartZone Conventional 001-7780-500_7780Series_ServiceManual

7780 to the manual 5ce12480-cf06-491b-8427-3eef45a21ab8

2015-02-02

: Efjohnson Efjohnson-Smartzone-7780-Users-Manual-426517 efjohnson-smartzone-7780-users-manual-426517 efjohnson pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 116 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

First Printing

November 1999

778x (800 MHz)

SMARTNET™/SmartZone®/Conventional

7.5VDC,1and3Watts

806-824 MHz Transmit

851-870 MHz Receive

Part No. 242-778x-50x

Full Keypad (15-Key) Model Limited Keypad (3-Key) Model

SMARTNET™/SMARTZONE® PORTABLE

Series

7780

PRELIMINARY SERVICE

MANUAL

7780-SERIES

SMARTNET /SMARTZONE /CONVENTIONAL

FM TWO-WAY

PORTABLE RADIO

7.5 VDC

806-824 MHz Transmit, 851-870 MHz Receive

1-Watt (Low Power), 3-Watts (High Power)

Part No. 242-778x-50x

E.F. Johnson Company, which was founded in 1923, designs, manufactures, and markets

radio communication products, systems, and services worldwide. E.F. Johnson produces

equipment for land mobile radio and mobiletelephone services which include business,

industrial, government, public safety, and personal users.

Viking Head/EFJohnson logo, Call Guard®, PCTrunk™, and PCTune™ are trademarks of

the E.F. Johnson Company. SMARTNET™, SmartZone®, Call Alert™, Enhanced Private

Conversation™, and Private Conversation II™ are trademarks of Motorola, Inc. All other

company and/or product names used in this manual are trademarks and/or registered trade-

marks of their respective manufacturer.

Information in this manual is subject to change without notice.

™®

TABLE OF CONTENTS

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 GENERAL INFORMATION

1.1 SCOPE OF MANUAL ....................1-1

1.2 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION .............1-1

Introduction............................. 1-1

OperatingProtocols ...................... 1-1

IntrinsicallySafeModels .................. 1-1

Systems,Channels,andZones.............. 1-1

NPSPACModels ........................ 1-2

Programming............................ 1-2

TransceiverAlignment.................... 1-2

1.3 PART NUMBER BREAKDOWN...........1-2

1.4 TRANSCEIVER IDENTIFICATION.........1-2

1.5 ACCESSORIES .........................1-2

1.6 FACTORY CUSTOMER SERVICE.........1-2

1.7 FACTORY RETURNS....................1-3

1.8 REPLACEMENT PARTS .................1-4

1.9 INTERNET HOME PAGE.................1-4

1.10 INTRINSICALLY SAFE INFORMATION....1-4

Introduction............................. 1-4

Definitions.............................. 1-4

PossibleIgnitionSources.................. 1-5

Intrinsically Safe and Nonincendive Ratings . . . 1-5

Classification of Hazardous Areas

andAtmospheres ...................... 1-5

1.11 ACCESSING PC BOARDS ...............1-6

Introduction............................. 1-6

RemovingTransceiverCase................ 1-6

UnpluggingFlexCables................... 1-6

RemovingRFUnit....................... 1-7

RemovingLogicUnit..................... 1-7

7780 SPECIFICATIONS..................1-8

2 TRANSCEIVER OPERATION

2.1 FEATURES.............................2-1

GeneralFeatures......................... 2-1

ConventionalFeatures .................... 2-1

SMARTNET™IIFeatures................. 2-1

SmartZone®Features..................... 2-1

Limited/Enhanced Keypad Features. . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.2 CONTROLS AND DISPLAY ..............2-1

TopPanelControls....................... 2-1

TopPanelIndicators...................... 2-2

SideControls............................ 2-2

Front Panel Keys (Limited Keypad Model) . . . . 2-2

Front Panel Keys (Full Keypad Model) . . . . . . . 2-3

Display ................................ 2-3

2.3 GENERAL OPERATION .................2-4

Introduction............................. 2-4

Turning Power On and Setting Volume . . . . . . . 2-4

Backlight............................... 2-4

OptionSwitches......................... 2-4

KeypadLock............................2-4

LowBatteryIndication ....................2-5

ChannelandZoneSelection ................2-5

HomeZone .............................2-5

Time-OutTimer..........................2-5

ToneEnable/Disable......................2-6

Scanning ...............................2-6

Conventional and SMARTNET/Smartzone

Operation.............................2-7

2.4 CONVENTIONAL FEATURES............2-8

Introduction.............................2-8

DisplayModeSelection....................2-8

MonitoringBeforeTransmitting.............2-8

MonitorMode...........................2-9

BusyChannelLockout ....................2-9

CallGuardSquelch.......................2-9

PenaltyTimer...........................2-10

ConversationTimer......................2-10

RepeaterTalk-Around....................2-10

PowerOutputSelect .....................2-10

ConventionalModeScanning..............2-10

PriorityChannelSampling ................2-11

StandardConventionalCalls...............2-12

DTMF/ANISignaling....................2-12

2.5 SMARTNET/SMARTZONE FEATURES ..2-13

Introduction............................2-13

ViewingUnitID ........................2-13

StandardGroupCalls.....................2-13

Enhanced Private Conversation Calls . . . . . . . . 2-13

PrivateConversationIICalls...............2-15

TelephoneCalls.........................2-16

CallAlert .............................2-17

Messaging.............................2-18

Sending Status Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

EmergencyAlarmandCall................2-18

FailsoftOperation .......................2-19

SMARTNET/SmartZoneScanning..........2-19

DynamicRegrouping.....................2-19

SmartZoneFeatures......................2-19

2.6 SUPERVISORY TONES ...............2-20

2.7 KEYPAD PROGRAMMING .............2-21

Introduction............................2-21

MenuDescription .......................2-21

ZoneChangeParameter...................2-21

ChannelChangeParameter................2-22

SystemParameters.......................2-22

ChannelParameters......................2-22

3 TRANSCEIVER PROGRAMMING

3.1 GENERAL .............................3-1

ProgrammingSetup.......................3-1

ComputerDescription.....................3-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT’D)

iii November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PCTrunkSoftwareInstallation.............. 3-1

Connecting RPI To Computer and Transceiver . 3-2

Starting and Exiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

ProgrammingFileTypes .................. 3-2

HelpFiles.............................. 3-2

ScreenTypes ........................... 3-2

FileSizeIndication....................... 3-3

CreatingandDisplayingSystems............ 3-3

3.2 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE ..........3-3

Preliminary............................. 3-3

ProgrammingRadioWideParameters........ 3-4

Programming Conventional Channels . . . . . . . . 3-4

Programming SMARTNET/SmartZone Systems 3-4

Programming Radio (Downloading File). . . . . . 3-4

3.3 MENU COMMANDS .....................3-4

FileMenu.............................. 3-4

RadioTypeMenu........................ 3-5

DownloadMenu......................... 3-5

UploadMenu ........................... 3-5

SystemsMenu .......................... 3-5

WindowMenu.......................... 3-5

HelpMenu............................. 3-6

3.4 RADIO-WIDE PARAMETER SCREENS....3-6

Introduction ............................ 3-6

Radio-WideGeneralscreen................ 3-6

Radio-Wide Conventional Screen . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Radio-Wide SMARTNET/SmartZone Screen . . 3-8

Radio-Wide Portable Options Screen. . . . . . . . . 3-9

3.5 PROGRAMMING CONVENTIONAL SYSTEMS

AND CHANNELS ......................3-9

Introduction ............................ 3-9

Conventional System General Screen . . . . . . . . 3-9

Setting Up Conventional Channels . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Conventional Channel Screen Parameters . . . . 3-12

3.6 PROGRAMMING SMARTNET/SMARTZONE

SYSTEMS AND CHANNELS...........3-13

Introduction ........................... 3-13

SMARTNET/SmartZone System Screens

GeneralScreen....................... 3-14

OtherID’sScreen..................... 3-15

InterconnectScreen................... 3-15

TalkGroupsScreen................... 3-16

EmergencySettingsScreen............. 3-16

ListsScreens......................... 3-17

Setting Up SMARTNET/SmartZone Channels 3-20

SMARTNET/SmartZone Channel Screen

Parameters.......................... 3-20

4 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

4.1 POWER SWITCHING AND REGULATION .4-1

PowerSwitching......................... 4-1

5-VoltRegulators(IC401,IC402)........... 4-1

4.2 SYNTHESIZER DESCRIPTION........... 4-1

Introduction............................. 4-1

VCO(IC3),Buffers(Q10-Q12) ............. 4-1

VCOAndTCXOModulation...............4-2

SynthesizerChip(IC1).................... 4-2

LockDetect(Q13)........................ 4-2

Charge Pump (Q1, Q2), Loop Filter . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

4.3 RECEIVER CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION...... 4-3

RFAmplifier(Q1),FirstMixer(Q2) .........4-3

IF Amplifier (Q2), Limiter/Detector (IC3) . . . . . 4-3

SquelchCircuit(IC4A/B,IC5A)............. 4-4

4.4 TRANSMITTER DESCRIPTION .......... 4-4

Amplifier(Q9),Driver(Q8)................ 4-4

Antenna Switch and Low-Pass Filter . . . . . . . . . 4-4

PowerControl(IC2A/B)................... 4-5

4.5 CONTROL LOGIC AND DISPLAY ........ 4-5

ControlLogic ........................... 4-5

DisplayAssemblyDescription.............. 4-5

4.6 RECEIVE AUDIO PROCESSING .........4-5

BandPass Filter (IC101) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Expander(IC208)........................ 4-8

AudioAmplifier(IC104-IC106)............. 4-8

4.7 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT DATA

PROCESSING ........................ 4-8

Receive Data Filter/Detector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Transmit Data Filter (IC206B/IC206A) . . . . . . . 4-9

4.8 TRANSMIT AUDIO PROCESSING........ 4-9

Gate (IC204), High-Pass Filter (IC202) . . . . . . . 4-9

Limiter(IC202B)......................... 4-9

Low-PassFilter(IC205A/B)............... 4-10

4.9 SMARTNET DATA PROCESSING.......4-10

5 BATTERY PACK AND CHARGER

INFORMATION

5.1 BATTERY PACK .......................5-1

General ................................ 5-1

BatteryCare............................. 5-1

5.2 RAPID CHARGER ...................... 5-1

6 ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE AND

PERFORMANCE TESTS

6.1 GENERAL ............................. 6-1

Introduction............................. 6-1

TestSetup .............................. 6-1

TuneSoftware........................... 6-2

PreliminarySetup........................ 6-3

MainPCTuneScreen...................... 6-3

RemovingTransceiverCover............... 6-4

6.2 TRANSMIT FREQUENCY AND POWER .. 6-4

FrequencyAdjustment .................... 6-4

PowerOutputAdjustment..................6-4

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT’D)

TABLE OF CONTENTS

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

6.3 MODULATION BALANCE................6-4

6.4 AUDIO DEVIATION......................6-5

6.5 DATA DEVIATION.......................6-5

6.6 SQUELCH ADJUST .....................6-5

6.7 RSSI ADJUST ..........................6-5

6.8 RECEIVER PERFORMANCE TESTS ......6-6

PreliminarySetup........................ 6-6

SINADSensitivity ....................... 6-6

SquelchSensitivity....................... 6-6

AudioPowerAndDistortion ............... 6-6

Receiver Current Drain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

6.9 TRANSMITTER PERFORMANCE TESTS ..6-7

PowerOutput ........................... 6-7

TransmitFrequency ...................... 6-7

TransmitModulation ..................... 6-7

TransmitterCurrentDrain.................. 6-7

7 PARTS LIST

ChassisParts............................ 7-1

JackAssembly .......................... 7-1

DisplayAssembly........................ 7-1

3-KeyAssembly......................... 7-2

10-KeyAssembly........................ 7-2

IFAssembly............................ 7-3

PLLAssembly .......................... 7-4

RFUnit................................ 7-4

LogicUnit.............................. 7-8

ExplodedViews..................7-13to7-16

8 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND

COMPONENT LAYOUTS

TransceiverBlockDiagram ................ 8-3

Schematic Diagrams

RFBoard..............................8-5

LogicBoard ...........................8-7

IDisplayBoard.........................8-9

10-KeyBoard.........................8-11

3-KeyBoard..........................8-13

PC Board Layouts

PLLBoard ............................8-1

IIFBoard..............................8-2

RFBoard..............................8-4

LogicBoard ...........................8-6

DisplayBoard..........................8-8

10-KeyBoard.........................8-10

3-KeyBoard..........................8-12

LIST OF TABLES

1-1 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

1-2 MaterialClassification ....................1-6

1-3 AreaClassification .......................1-6

2-1 OptionSwitchFunctions ..................2-5

3-1 Call Guard (CTCSS/DCS) Codes and Tones . . 3-22

4-1 Microprocessor IC306 Pin Descriptions . . . . . . . 4-6

LIST OF FIGURES

1-1 RemovingCaseScrews................... 1-6

2-1 LimitedKeypadModel................... 2-2

2-2 FullKeypadModel...................... 2-2

2-3 Display................................ 2-3

2-4 Keypad Programming Menu Flowchart . . . . . 2-21

3-1 ProgrammingSetup...................... 3-1

3-2 RPI-TransceiverCableSchematic.......... 3-2

3-3 ConventionalChannelScreen............. 3-12

3-4 SMARTNET/SmartZone Channel Screen. . . . 3-21

4-1 Limiter/Mixer/DetectorIC3................ 4-3

6-1 AlignmentSetupDiagram................. 6-1

6-2 PCTuneMainScreen..................... 6-3

6-3 ConnectingDCPower.................... 6-4

1-1 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

GENERAL INFORMATION

SECTION 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

1.1 SCOPE OF MANUAL

This service manual contains operating, program-

ming, alignment, and service information for the E.F.

Johnson 7780 800 MHz portable transceiver.

1.2 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

1.2.1 INTRODUCTION

The 7780 800 MHz portable transceiver is avail-

able in limited keypad (3-key) and full keypad (15-

key) models. In addition, standard and intrinsically

safe versions are available (see Section 1.2.3). With all

versions, up to 16 zones can be programmed, and each

zone can contain up to 16 channels resulting in up to

256 total channels. The rotary switch on the top panel

provides channel select, and an option switch provides

zone select if applicable.

The 7780 is an 800 MHz transceiver which oper-

ates on the 920 channels from 806-824 MHz (mobile

transmit). The receive channels are 45 MHz above

these frequencies from 851-869 MHz. All models can

be programmed for both narrow and wide band opera-

tion. With narrow band operation, the channel spacing

is 12.5 kHz and maximum deviation 2.5 kHz; with

wideband operation, the channel spacing is 25 kHz

and maximum deviation is 5 kHz. On NPSPAC chan-

nels, maximum deviation is 4 kHz (see Section 1.2.5).

1.2.2 OPERATING PROTOCOLS

The 7780 operates on analog channels utilizing

the following operating protocols:

•Conventional (non trunked)

•SMARTNET II/SmartZone (trunked)

1.2.3 INTRINSICALLY SAFE MODELS

NOTE: Contact your sales representative to determine

the availability of intrinsically safe models.

The intrinsically safe versions of the 7780 (see

Section 1.3) meet Factory Mutual standards for opera-

tion in certain flammable atmospheres. Basically, the

same service information used to service standard

models is also used to service these models. Refer to

Section 1.10 for more information on the intrinsically

safe rating and additional requirements for servicing

intrinsically safe models.

1.2.4 SYSTEMS, CHANNELS, AND ZONES

A zone and channel are selected to place and

receive calls. The following describes the relationship

between systems, channels, and zones.

Systems

A system as used with this transceiver is a collec-

tion of channels (talk groups) belonging to the same

repeater site. A system defines all the parameters and

protocol definitions required to access a site. Up to

1 conventional system and 15 SmartNet/SmartZone

systems can be programmed (16 total). Systems are

used for programming purposes only and are not

selectable by the user.

Channels

A channel selects a radio channel or talk group in

a system as follows:

Conventional Mode - A channel selects a specific

radio channel, Call Guard (CTCSS/DCS) squelch

coding, and other parameters unique to that channel.

SmartNet/SmartZone Mode - A channel selects a

specific talk group, announcement group, emergency

group, and other parameters unique to that channel.

As previously described, a maximum of up to

256 channels can be programmed with the preceding

modes. The conventional system can be programmed

with up to 256 channels, and each SmartNet/Smart-

Zone system can be programmed with up to 256 talk

groups (channels).

Therefore it is theoretically possible to program

any combination of these systems that produces up to

256 total channels. However, the maximum number

may be limited by the available memory. For example,

since more memory is required to program a SmartNet

system than a conventional system, the total number

GENERAL INFORMATION

1-2

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

RIFKDQQHOVGHFUHDVHVDVWKHQXPEHURI6PDUW1HW

V\VWHPVLQFUHDVHV7KHSURJUDPPLQJVRIWZDUH

GLVSOD\VDEDUJUDSKZKLFKVKRZVWKHDPRXQWRIDYDLO

DEOHPHPRU\VSDFHWKDWLVXVHGE\WKHFXUUHQWGDWD

5HIHUWR6HFWLRQIRUPRUHLQIRUPDWLRQ

=RQHV

$]RQHLVDFROOHFWLRQRIXSWRFKDQQHOVRIDQ\

W\SHFRQYHQWLRQDORU6PDUW1HW6PDUW=RQH)RU

H[DPSOHD]RQHFRXOGLQFOXGHFRQYHQWLRQDOFKDQ

QHOVDQG6PDUW1HWFKDQQHOV=RQHVDUHVLPLODUWR

EDQNVXVHGLQRWKHU()-RKQVRQWUDQVFHLYHUV2QHXVH

RI]RQHVPD\EHWRSURJUDPWKHFKDQQHOVXVHGIRU

RSHUDWLRQLQDVSHFLILFJHRJUDSKLFDODUHD8SWR

]RQHVFDQEHSURJUDPPHG

1.2.5 NPSPAC MODELS

$OOPRGHOVPHHWWKHVWULFWHUVSHFLILFDWLRQV

HVWDEOLVKHGE\1363$&1DWLRQDO3XEOLF6DIHW\3DQHO

$GYLVRU\&RPPLWWHHIRUSXEOLFVDIHW\IUHTXHQFLHV

IURPDQG0+]0D[LPXPGHYLDWLRQ

RQ1363$&FKDQQHOVLVN+]DQGLWLVDXWRPDWLFDOO\

FKDQJHGWRWKHOHYHOVHWIRU1363$&FKDQQHOVZKHQ

RQHRIWKHVHFKDQQHOVLVVHOHFWHGVHH6HFWLRQ

1.2.6 PROGRAMMING

7KHWUDQVFHLYHULVSURJUDPPHGXVLQJD3&

FRPSDWLEOHFRPSXWHUWKH()-RKQVRQ5HPRWH

3URJUDPPLQJ,QWHUIDFH53,DQGWKH3&7UXQN

SURJUDPPLQJVRIWZDUHVHH7DEOH3URJUDPPLQJ

LVGHVFULEHGLQ6HFWLRQ&ORQLQJSURJUDPPLQJRQH

WUDQVFHLYHUZLWKDQRWKHULVQRWDYDLODEOH7KHRSHU

DWLQJVRIWZDUHLV)ODVKXSJUDGDEOHLIUHTXLUHG

1.2.7 TRANSCEIVER ALIGNMENT

7UDQVFHLYHUDOLJQPHQWLVSHUIRUPHGXVLQJWKH

VDPHFRPSXWHUDQG53,XVHGWRSHUIRUPSURJUDP

PLQJVHHSUHFHGLQJVHFWLRQDQGVSHFLDO3&7XQH

VRIWZDUH2QO\WZRDGMXVWPHQWVDUHPDGHPDQXDOO\

DQGWKHUHVWDUHPDGHHOHFWURQLFDOO\XVLQJWKH3&7XQH

VRIWZDUH7KHWUDQVFHLYHUFDQXVXDOO\EHWXQHGZLWKRXW

GLVDVVHPEOLQJWKHWUDQVFHLYHUWRDFFHVVLQWHUQDODGMXVW

PHQWV5HIHUWR6HFWLRQIRUPRUHLQIRUPDWLRQ

1.3 PART NUMBER BREAKDOWN

7KHIROORZLQJLVDEUHDNGRZQRIWKHSDUWQXPEHU

XVHGWRLGHQWLI\WKLVWUDQVFHLYHU

1.4 TRANSCEIVER IDENTIFICATION

7KHWUDQVFHLYHULGHQWLILFDWLRQQXPEHULVSULQWHG

RQDODEHOWKDWLVDIIL[HGWRWKHEDFNFRYHU7KHLQIRU

PDWLRQLQWKLVQXPEHULVDVIROORZV

1.5 ACCESSORIES

7KHDFFHVVRULHVWKDWDUHDYDLODEOHIRUWKLVWUDQV

FHLYHUDUHOLVWHGLQ7DEOH

1.6 FACTORY CUSTOMER SERVICE

7KH&XVWRPHU6HUYLFH'HSDUWPHQWRI()-RKQVRQ

SURYLGHVFXVWRPHUDVVLVWDQFHRQWHFKQLFDOSUREOHPV

DQGWKHDYDLODELOLW\RIORFDODQGIDFWRU\UHSDLUIDFLOL

WLHV5HJXODU&XVWRPHU6HUYLFHKRXUVDUH$0

30&HQWUDO7LPH0RQGD\)ULGD\7KH

 [[[

0+]

6WDQGDUG

,QWULQ6DIH

:DFFHVVRULHVOLPLWHGNH\NH\SDG

:DFFHVVRULHVIXOONH\NH\SDG

:RDFFHVVOLPLWHGNH\NH\SDG

:RDFFHVVIXOONH\NH\SDG

60$571(7&RQY

60$571(76PDUW=RQH&RQY

[[ $-

0RGHO

5HYLVLRQ

/HWWHU

0DQXIDFWXUH

'DWH 3ODQW

:DUUDQW\

1XPEHU

:HHN1R

RI<HDU /DVW'LJLWRI<HDU

60$571(7

6HH6HFWLRQ

--DSDQ

60$571(76PDUW=RQH

GENERAL INFORMATION

1-3 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

Customer Service Department can be reached using

one of the following telephone numbers:

Toll-Free: (800) 328-3911

(From within continental United States only)

International: (507) 835-6911

FAX: (507) 835-6969

E-Mail: First Initial/Last Name@efjohnson.com

(You need to know the name of the person you want to

reach. Example: jsmith@efjohnson.com)

NOTE: Emergency 24-hour technical support is also

available at the 800 and preceding numbers during off

hours, holidays, and weekends.

When your call is answered at the E.F. Johnson

Company, you will hear a brief message informing

you of numbers that can be entered to reach various

departments. This number may be entered during or

after the message using a tone-type telephone. If you

have a pulse-type telephone, wait until the message is

finishedandanoperatorwillcomeonthelinetoassist

you. When you enter some numbers, another number

is requested to further categorize the type of informa-

tion you need.

You may also contact the Customer Service

Department by mail. Please include all information

that may be helpful in solving your problem. The

mailing address is as follows:

E.F. Johnson Company

Customer Service Department

299 Johnson Avenue

P.O. Box 1249

Waseca, MN 56093-0514

1.7 FACTORY RETURNS

Repair service is normally available through local

authorized EFJohnson Land Mobile Radio Service

Centers. If local service is not available, the equipment

canbereturnedtothefactoryforrepair.However,itis

recommended that you contact the Customer Service

Department before returning equipment because a

service representative may be able to suggest a solu-

tion to the problem so that return of the equipment

would not be necessary.

Be sure to fill out a Factory Repair Request Form

#271 for each unit to be repaired, whether it is in or

out of warranty. These forms are available free of

charge by calling Customer Service (see Section 1.6)

or by requesting them when you send a unit in for

repair. Clearly describe the difficulty experienced in

the space provided and also note any prior physical

damage to the equipment. Then include a form in the

shipping container with each unit. Your telephone

number and contact name are important because there

Table 1-1 Accessories

Accessory Part No.

Battery Pack, NiMH 1400 mAH

Standard 587-8150-135

Intrinsically safe [1] 587-8150-136

Antenna, flexible half-wave 800 MHz [1] 585-5000-053

Antenna, 800 MHz 501-8100-001

Speaker-microphone, w/360° swiv clip [1] 589-0015-040

Speaker-microphone, heavy duty 589-0015-047

Earphone adapter [1] 585-5000-051

Earphone, standard (for -040/-051) [1] 589-9003-004

Earphone, heavy duty w/coil cord 250-0881-003

Carrying Accessories

D-swivel for back of transceiver 250-5810-123

Leather case with D-swivel 585-5000-052

Leather belt loop with D-swivel 023-8790-130

Belt Clip, plastic spring loaded [1] 585-5000-054

Battery Chargers

Single-unit rapid base 585-5020-020

120 VAC power supply for -020 base 585-5020-021

230 VAC power supply for -020 base 585-5020-022

Programming Accessories

Remote Programming Interface (RPI) 023-9800-000

Cable, RPI to transceiver 597-2002-123

Cable, RPI - computer, 6 ft.

(DB9 F - DB9 M) 597-5900-002

PCTrunk programming software, 3.5” 023-9998-453

PCTune tuning software, 3.5” diskette Contact Cust Serv

SMA to BNC M-F antenna jack adapter 515-3102-060

[1] Factory Mutual approved for use on intrinsically safe

models.

GENERAL INFORMATION

1-4

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

are times when the technicians have specific questions

that need to be answered in order to completely iden-

tify and repair a problem.

When returning equipment for repair, it is also a

good idea to use a PO number or some other reference

number on your paperwork in case you need to call

the repair lab about your unit. These numbers are

referenced on the repair order and it makes it easier

and faster to locate your unit in the lab.

Return Authorization (RA) numbers are not

necessary unless you have been given one by the Field

Service Department. RA numbers are required for

exchange units or if the Field Service Department

wants to be aware of a specific problem. If you have

been given an RA number, reference this number on

the Factory Repair Request Form sent with the unit.

The repair lab will then contact the Field Service

Department when the unit arrives.

1.8 REPLACEMENT PARTS

Replacement parts can be ordered directly from

the Service Parts Department. To order parts by

phone, dial the toll-free number as described in

Section 1.6. When ordering, please supply the part

number and quantity of each part ordered. EFJohnson

dealers also need to give their account number. If there

is uncertainty about the part number, include the

designator (C512, for example) and the model number

of the equipment the part is from.

You may also send your order by mail or FAX.

The mailing address is as follows and the FAX

number is shown in Section 1.6.

E.F. Johnson Company

Service Parts Department

299 Johnson Avenue

P.O. Box 1249

Waseca, MN 56093-0514

1.9 INTERNET HOME PAGE

EFJohnson has a site on the World Wide Web that

can be accessed for information on the company and

such things as products, systems, and regulations. The

address is http://www.efjohnson.com.

1.10 INTRINSICALLY SAFE INFORMATION

NOTE: Contact your sales representative to determine

the availability of intrinsically safe models.

1.10.1 INTRODUCTION

Intrinsically safe 7780 transceivers have been

approved by the Factory Mutual Research Corporation

for operation in certain flammable atmospheres. The

specific atmospheres in which operation is approved

are shown in Section 1.10.5 and also on the label on

the back cover of the transceiver.

WARNING

When servicing an intrinsically safe transceiver, these

rules must be followed to maintain intrinsic safety:

•Service can be provided only by the factory or by

service centers specifically authorized by the

Factory Mutual Research Corporation to service

E.F. Johnson intrinsically safe transceivers. Contact

Factory Mutual at the following address for infor-

mation concerning their auditing procedure.

Contact the E.F. Johnson Customer Service Depart-

ment as described in Section 1.6 if you have

questions.

Factory Mutual Research Corporation

1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike

P.O. Box 9102

Norwood, Massachusetts 02062

Phone: (617) 762-4300

•Replace the battery pack only with Intrinsically

Safe Battery Pack, Part No. 587-8150-136.

•Do not make any modifications to the circuitry.

•When replacing a part, use only the exact replace-

ment part listed in the service manual parts list.

•Do not install any accessory that is not specifically

approved for use with intrinsically safe 7780

models.

1.10.2 DEFINITIONS

Intrinsically Safe - This is a fire rating given to these

transceivers by the Factory Mutual Research Corpora-

GENERAL INFORMATION

1-5 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

tion. When electrical equipment is given this rating, the

equipment is considered incapable of releasing suffi-

cient electrical and thermal energy under normal oper-

ation or specified fault conditions per the testing

standard to cause ignition of a specific flammable or

combustible atmosphere in its most easily ignited con-

centration. In other words, this transceiver should not

cause a fire or explosion when used in certain flamma-

ble atmospheres.

Fault - A defect or electrical breakdown of any compo-

nent, spacing, or insulation which alone or in combina-

tion with other faults may adversely affect the electrical

or thermal characteristics of the intrinsically safe circuit

(for example, a shorted transistor).

1.10.3 POSSIBLE IGNITION SOURCES

When a transceiver is checked by Factory

Mutual, possible sources of ignition are checked.

These sources may be electrical (spark) or thermal

(heat). The following could be sources of spark

ignition:

•Discharge of a capacitive circuit by a fault such as a

short circuit.

•Interruption of an inductive circuit.

•Intermittent making or breaking of a resistive

circuit.

•Hot-wire fusing.

The following could be sources of thermal

ignition:

•Heating of a small-gauge wire or PC board trace.

•High surface temperature of components.

1.10.4 INTRINSICALLY SAFE AND

NONINCENDIVE RATINGS

This transceiver is rated intrinsically safe for

some types of hazards and nonincendive for other

types of hazards. An intrinsically safe rating applies to

operation in Division 1 areas, and a nonincendive

rating applies to operation in Division 2 areas (see

next section). The difference between these ratings is

as follows:

The intrinsically safe rating is a higher rating

because more severe conditions must be met. To be

approved for this rating, the transceiver must not cause

ignition of a particular atmosphere if two of the faults

specified in the testing procedure occur. In other

words, it must be able to withstand two simultaneous

unrelated breakdowns without causing ignition. To

receive a nonincendive rating, the transceiver needs to

withstand only a single fault without causing ignition

of a particular atmosphere.

1.10.5 CLASSIFICATION OF HAZARDOUS

AREAS AND ATMOSPHERES

Introduction

This transceiver has been submitted for approval

to operate in the following hazardous atmospheres and

areas. Contact your sales representative or refer to the

label on the back of the transceiver to determine the

specific atmospheres and areas for which approval was

obtained.

Intrinsically Safe - Class I, II, and III, Division 1,

Groups C, D, E, F, and G.

Nonincendive - Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C,

and D.

Temperature Code - T3C

The meanings of these Class, Division, and

Group designations are as follows.

Atmosphere Classification (Class/Group)

For the purposes of testing and approval, various

atmospheric mixtures have been grouped on the basis

of their hazardous characteristics. Equipment is

approved for a class of material and also for the

specific gas, vapor, or dust in that class. Class I mate-

rials include gases and vapors, and Class II materials

include combustible dusts. The various classes and

some specific groups of gases in each are shown in

Table 1-2.

Area Classification (Division)

Areas are either Division 1, 2, or 3 as shown in

Table 1-3. Since a Division 1 area is considered the

most hazardous, a transceiver approved for a specific

Division 1 area can also be used in the same Division

2 Class/Group.

GENERAL INFORMATION

1-6

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

1.11 ACCESSING PC BOARDS

1.11.1 INTRODUCTION

The RF unit is located under the back cover and

the logic unit is located under the front cover. These

boards connect together using a 30-pin connector on

the bottom side. Since both boards have numerous

parts on the bottom (hidden) side, the board may need

to be removed to replace components. To operate the

transceiver with the RF unit removed, a special exten-

sion test cable is required.

Also inside the transceiver are display and

keypad boards. These boards are mounted to the inside

of the front cover. Proceed as follows to remove the

RF and logic unit board from the transceiver.

1.11.2 REMOVING TRANSCEIVER CASE

To access the internal parts in the transceiver, the

plastic case must first be removed. Proceed as follows:

1. If you have not already done so, remove the battery

by pressing the release button upward and then

sliding it off the transceiver. If the belt clip is

mounted on the back, it must also be removed.

2. Remove the three screws in the back and two in the

bottom end that are indicated in Figure 1-1. Slide the

case off.

3. Removing the two screws in the end also allows the

front panel to be removed. Simply lift it outward if

desired. If you do not want to remove the front

panel, temporarily replace one of the end screws.

CAUTION

Excessive flexing of the ribbon cables may result in

broken traces.

Figure 1-1 Removing Case Screws

1.11.3 UNPLUGGING FLEX CABLES

The flex cable to the front panel and also the

accessory jack and PTT switch flex cables to the logic

board are inserted into a locking-type connector. To

release the cable so that it can be removed from the

connector, the locking tangs must be pulled out as

shown in the following illustration.

Table 1-2 Material Classification

Typical Hazard Group Class

Acetylene A I

Hydrogen B I

Ethylene, ethyl ether, cyclopropane C I

Gasoline, naphtha, butane, propane,

alcohol, acetone, benzol, natural gas DI

Metal dust including aluminum, mag-

nesium, and their alloys EII

Carbon black, coal, or coke dust F II

Flour, starch, or grain dusts G II

Ignitable fibers/flyings such as rayon

or cotton -III

Table 1-3 Area Classification

Division Area

1 An area where there is or could be an explosive

atmosphere most of the time in normal opera-

tion

2 An area where an explosive atmosphere exists

only as a result of a fault (something going

wrong)

REMOVE

THESE

SCREWS

GENERAL INFORMATION

1-7 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

1.11.4 REMOVING RF UNIT

1. Remove the five screws attaching the shield to the

PC board.

2. Remove the two screws securing the RF power

module to the chassis. Then remove the four stand-

offs attaching the RF board to the chassis.

3. Unsolder the antenna connector from the PC board

by removing the solder at the locations shown in the

following illustration.

4. Remove the PC board by lifting it upward. The RF-

to-logic board connector under the IF board must

unplug, so some resistance may be encountered. Do

not pull on the IF or PLL board assemblies because

they can be easily damaged.

1.11.5 REMOVING LOGIC UNIT

1. Remove the top panel knobs. Then remove the

spanner nuts on the quick select and on-off/volume

switches. Remove the plastic top panel.

2. Unplug the flex cables from the front panel, acces-

sory connector, and PTT switch as described in

Section 1.11.3.

3. Unsolder the DC power flex circuit attached to the

logic unit near the accessory flex circuit connector.

4. Remove the four screws attaching the logic unit to

the chassis.

5. Remove the logic unit by carefully lifting it

outward.The RF-to-logic board connector under the

IF board must unplug, so some resistance may be

encountered. There is a pry hole (indicated by an

arrow) on the lower left edge of the PC board.

LOCK

UNLOCK

WIRE IN

PC BD ANTENNA

CONNECTOR

SOLDER

GENERAL INFORMATION

1-8

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

7780 SPECIFICATIONS

The following are general specifications intended for use in testing and servicing the transceiver. For current advertised

specifications, refer to the 7780 product information sheet available from your E.F. Johnson sales representative. Specifica-

tions are subject to change without notice. GENERAL

Operating Mode SMARTNET/SmartZone (trunked) and conventional (non-trunked)

Frequency Range 806-824 MHz transmit (SMARTNET/SmartZone/conventional standard)

851-869 MHz transmit (conventional talk-around)

851-869 MHz receive

Zones Programmable Up to 16

Channels Programmable Up to 16 per zone (256 total)

Transmit/Receive Separation 45 MHz standard, 0 MHz conventional talk-around

Channel Spacing 12.5 kHz - 2.5 kHz maximum deviation

25 kHz - 5 kHz max deviation standard, 4 kHz NPSPAC

Frequency Stability (tx and rx) 1.5 PPM –22° to +140° F (–30° to +60° C)

Dimensions(withbatteryandcontrols) 6.5”Hx2.2”Wx1.2”D

166mmHx56mmWx30mmD

Weight (with battery) 18 oz. (515 g)

Power Source 7.5 VDC nickel metal-hydride (NiMH) battery pack, 1300 maH

Typical Battery Life (5-5-90) 7.5 hours (high power), 8.6 hours (low power)

Compliance FCC parts 15 and 90

Circuit Protection 3-ampere fuse

RECEIVER

Sensitivity 0.35 µV (12 dB SINAD)

Selectivity –65 dB at 25 kHz

Spurious and Image Rejection –60 dB at 25 kHz

Intermodulation –65 dB at 25 kHz

Audio Output Power Internal Speaker - 0.5 watt (16-ohm load)

External - 1.5 V rms (680-ohm load)

Audio Distortion Less than 5% at rated power (0.5 watt)

Audio Response +1, –3 dB at 6 dB per octave de-emphasis characteristic

Channel Spread 18 MHz

Current Drain Standby (squelched) - 92 mA maximum

Rated Audio Output - 300 mA maximum

TRANSMITTER

High RF Power Output

Standard Models 3.0 watts (standard mode)

2.5 watts (conventional talk-around mode)

Intrinsically Safe Models 2.0 watts at less than 1.55 A (standard mode)

1.8 watt at less than 1.60 A (talk-around mode)

Low RF Power Output 1.0 watt (all models and modes)

Spurious and Harmonic –60 dB at 25 kHz

FM Hum and Noise –40 dB at 25 kHz

Audio Distortion 5% maximum at 1 kHz

Audio Frequency Response +1, –3 dB from a 6 dB per octave pre-emphasis characteristic

Audio Modulation 11K0F3E, 16K0F3E, 14K0F3E

Channel Spread 18 MHz (no degradation); 63 MHz (talk-around)

Current Drain (maximum) Low Power - 1.3 ampere

High Power Standard Models -1.75 ampere (2.0 ampere talk-around)

Load Impedance 50 ohms

Duty Cycle (6-6-48 seconds) 5% (Transmit-Receive-Standby)

2-1 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

TRANSCEIVER OPERATION

SECTION 2 TRANSCEIVER OPERATION

2.1 FEATURES

2.1.1 GENERAL FEATURES

•16 zones with home zone select

•16 channels per zone (256 channels total)

•Radio-wide scan

•Time-out timer

•LCD 8-character alphanumeric display with 12

status annunciators

2.1.2 CONVENTIONAL FEATURES

•Channel scan with three user programmable scan

lists

•Priority channel sampling

•Busy channel lockout (transmit disable on busy)

•Monitor mode

•Call Guard® (CTCSS/DCS) squelch control

•Penalty timer

•Conversation timer

•Repeater talk-around

•DTMF/ANI signaling

•User selectable power output

•Selectable channel display mode

2.1.3 SMARTNET™ II FEATURES

•Group, Enhanced Private Conversation™, Private

Conversation II™, and telephone calls

•Call Alert™ (paging)

•Emergency calls

•Messaging

•Priority monitor scanning

•Failsoft operation

•Dynamic regrouping

2.1.4 SMARTZONE® FEATURES

•Site trunking

•Site search

•Site lock/unlock

2.1.5 LIMITED/ENHANCED KEYPAD

FEATURES

Limited (3-key) and Enhanced (15-key) models

of this transceiver are available. Most features avail-

able with the enhanced keypad model are also avail-

able with the limited keypad model. The features not

available with the limited (3-key) model are as

follows:

•Since the DTMF keys are not available, it is not

possible to dial telephone numbers or manually

send DTMF tones. However, telephone calls can

still be placed using prestored numbers.

•With conventional standard scanning, only one scan

list is available and it is not user programmable.

•With SMARTNET/SmartZone operation, direct

entry of unit ID numbers is not available when

making private calls or sending pages. However,

these calls can still be made by recalling the ID from

a prestored list.

2.2 CONTROLS AND DISPLAY

2.2.1 TOP PANEL CONTROLS

On-Off Volume - Turning this knob clockwise turns

power on and sets the volume level. Turning it coun-

terclockwise to the detent turns power off.

Channel Select Switch - Selectsupto16prepro-

grammed channels. The selected channel is also indi-

catedinthedisplay.

Antenna Jack - Connection point for the antenna.

BATT

OFF/VOL

1110 9

Transmitter

Keyed

Receive Signal

Detected

Low

Battery

On-Off/Volume

Antenna Jack

Channel Select Sw

TRANSCEIVER OPERATION

2-2

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

Figure 2-1 Limited Keypad Model

2.2.2 TOP PANEL INDICATORS

TX Indicator (Red) - Indicates when the transmitter

is keyed.

RX Indicator (Green) - Indicates that the channel

may be busy because a carrier is being detected.

Low-Battery Indicator (Amber) -

Indicates that the battery charge is

getting low and recharging will

soon be required.

2.2.3 SIDE CONTROLS

AUX (Auxiliary) - This is a dealer

programmable switch that can con-

trol various functions (see Section

2.3.4). With the limited keypad

(3-key) version, it is also the CLR

key.

PTT (Push-To-Talk) - This switch

is pressed to key the transmitter.

The red TX indicator on the top

panel lights when the transmitter is

keyed.

Figure 2-2 Full Keypad Model

FCN (Function) - This is a dealer programmable

switch that can control various functions (see Section

2.3.4).

Battery Release Button - Pushing this spring-loaded

button upward releases the battery so that it can slide

off the radio for recharging or replacement. Turn

power off before removing the battery.

Accessory Connector (not shown) - This connector is

on the opposite side of the transceiver, and it is the

connection point for optional accessories such as a

speaker-microphone.

2.2.4 FRONT PANEL KEYS (LIMITED KEYPAD

MODEL)

The following keys are located on the front panel

shown in Figure 2-1:

F1, F2, F3 - Each of these keys can be dealer pro-

grammed to control a specific function (see Section

2.3.4). These keys are also used in menus to scroll left

( ), scroll right ( ), and for the Enter (ENT) func-

tion. The top key on the side (AUX) functions as a

CLR key in menus.

F1 F3

ENT

CLR

789

AUX

PTT

FCN

Battery Release

Button

TRANSCEIVER OPERATION

2-3 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

Figure 2-3 Display

Low Battery

Monitor

Mode

Talk-Around

Mode

Radio-

Wide

Scan

In Scan

List

Scan

Enabled

Low Tx

Power Busy

Channel

Priority

Channel

Private

Call

Telephone

Call

Keypad

Locked

Keypad Prog.

Mode

Alphanumeric

Display

2.2.5 FRONT PANEL KEYS (FULL KEYPAD

MODEL)

The following keys are located on the front panel

shown in Figure 2-2:

0-9-These keys enter a number whenever number

entry is required.

F1 - This key is dealer programmable to control a

specific function (see Section 2.3.4).

F2 - This key is dealer programmable to control a

specific function (see Section 2.3.4). In addition, in

menus, it provides the Clear (CLR) function.

F3 - This key is dealer programmable to control a

specific function (see Section 2.3.4). In addition, in

menus, it provides the Enter (ENT) function.

-This key is dealer programmable to control a

specific function (see Section 2.3.4). In addition, in

menus, it provides the Scroll Left () function.

-This key is dealer programmable to control a

specific function (see Section 2.3.4). In addition, in

menus, it provides the Scroll Right () function.

2.2.6 DISPLAY

The following information is indicated by the

display shown in Figure 2-3:

Alphanumeric Display - This eight-character area of

the display indicates alphanumeric messages and

feature selection information.

S-Standard scanning is enabled (see Section 2.3.11).

Standard and radio wide scanning cannot be enabled at

thesametime.

- The current conventional channel is in the

standard scan list (see Section 2.3.11).

- Telephone (interconnect) mode is selected

with SMARTNET/SmartZone channels only (Section

2.5.6).

- Radio-wide scan is enabled (see Section

2.3.11).

- Repeater talk-around is enabled (see Section

2.4.9).

C-A SMARTNET/SmartZone private call is occur-

ring (see Sections 2.5.4 and 2.5.5).

- The conventional monitor mode is enabled (see

Section 2.4.4).

P-The selected conventional channel is a priority

channel (see Section 2.4.12).

LOW -Low transmit power is selected on a conven-

tional channel (see Section 2.4.10).

TRANSCEIVER OPERATION

2-4

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

BUSY -A busy system or transmit channel is being

detected by the Busy Channel Lockout feature (see

Section 2.4.5).

- The battery needs recharging (see Section

2.3.6).

- The keypad has been locked by pressing the

Keypad Lock option switch (see Section 2.3.5).

2.3 GENERAL OPERATION

2.3.1 INTRODUCTION

This section (2.3) describes features available

with both trunked and conventional operation. For

information on features unique to conventional chan-

nels, refer to Section 2.4, and for information on

features unique to SMARTNET/SmartZone channels,

refer to Section 2.5.

2.3.2 TURNING POWER ON AND SETTING

VOLUME

Power is turned on and off by the On-Off/Volume

switch on the top panel. When power is initially turned

on, an alert tone sounds and the radio software version

is momentarily displayed. If a SMARTNET/Smart-

Zone channel is selected, the zone alias is then

displayed followed by the unit ID (see page 13). The

selected channel is then indicated.

To turn power off, turn the On-Off/Volume knob

counterclockwise until a click occurs. The display may

remain on for a few seconds after power is turned off.

It is recommended that power not be turned back on

again until the display is blank.

The relative volume level can be determined by

noting the position of the index on the On-Off/Volume

knob. To enable a reference tone for setting the

volume, proceed as follows:

•If key press tones are enabled (see Section 2.3.10),

a short tone sounds when front panel keys are

pressed.

•If a conventional channel is selected and the

Monitor option switch is programmed (see Section

2.4.4), pressing that switch unsquelches/squelches

the receiver and either voice or background noise is

heard. If a SMARTNET/SmartZone channel is

selected, the receiver cannot be manually

unsquelched.

2.3.3 BACKLIGHT

The backlight for the display and keypad can be

manually turned on by pressing the Backlight option

switch if it is available. It can also be dealer

programmed to automatically turn on when any key is

pressed. It then automatically turns off after the

programmed delay so that battery drain is minimized.

2.3.4 OPTION SWITCHES

The programmable option switches are as

follows, and the programmable functions are shown in

Table 2-1.

•F1, F2, F3

•,#(full keypad 15-key models only)

•AUX, FCN (on side)

If the radio is programmed with both conven-

tional and SMARTNET/SmartZone channels (see

Section 2.3.12), these option switches can control a

different set of functions for each channel type. For

example, the F1 switch could select Hi/Lo Power

when a conventional channel is selected and Private

Calls when a SMARTNET/SmartZone channel is

selected. If no option switch has been programmed to

control a particular function, that function may not be

available or may be in a fixed mode.

2.3.5 KEYPAD LOCK

If the Keypad Lock option switch has been

programmed, the keypad can be locked (disabled) to

prevent keys from being accidentally pressed. To lock

the keypad, press this switch and a locked keypad is

indicated by the icon in the display. To unlock the

keypad again, press and hold the Keypad Lock switch

until a tone sounds (approximately 1 second). The

keypad can also be disabled by programming. It is

then permanently disabled and cannot be re-enabled

by the user.

TRANSCEIVER OPERATION

2-5 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

2.3.6 LOW BATTERY INDICATION

When the battery voltage falls below a preset

level, the icon appears in the display. This

icon stays on until power is turned off. In addition, the

following low battery indications may be programmed

to occur:

•The amber BATT indicator on the top panel lights.

•A beep sounds once per minute in the standby mode.

•A beep sounds each time the PTT switch is pressed.

The battery should be recharged as soon as prac-

tical after a low battery indication appears. Refer to

Section 5 for more battery information. There is also a

battery saver function that can be enabled by program-

ming. This function uses the RSSI level to determine

when the site is very near and then automatically

switches to the low transmit power output level.

2.3.7 CHANNEL AND ZONE SELECTION

Channel Select

To change the current channel, rotate the 16-posi-

tion channel selector knob on the top panel to the

desired position. With SMARTNET/SmartZone chan-

nels, the channel is always indicated by alias (name).

With conventional channels, the channel number or

frequency may also be displayed (see Section 2.4.2).

Zone Select

A zone is a group of up to any 16 conventional

and SMARTNET/SmartZone channels defined by

programming (see Section 1.2.4). Up to 16 zones can

be programmed for a total of 16 x 16 or 256 channels.

One use of zones may be to select groups of channels

programmed for operation in different geographical

areas or radio systems. Zones are selected as follows:

1. Press the Zone option switch and the alias (name) of

the current zone is flashed in the display.

2. Use the number keys to enter the desired zone

number or scroll through the available zones using

the and keys.

3. Once the desired zone is displayed, press the ENT

key or wait 4 seconds.

2.3.8 HOME ZONE

The radio can be programmed with a home zone.

Then when power is turned on, the radio can be

programmed so that either the home or last selected

zone is automatically selected.

If the Home Zone option switch is programmed,

itcanbeusedtoquicklyselectorchangethehome

zone. To select the home zone, momentarily press this

switch. Then to change the home zone to the currently

selected zone, press and hold this switch until a tone

sounds (approximately 1 second).

2.3.9 TIME-OUT TIMER

The time-out timer disables the transmitter if it is

keyed for longer than the programmed time. On each

Table 2-1 Option Switch Functions

Function Conv.

Mode

Smart-

Net

Mode

Smart-

Zone

Mode

See

Section

Backlight X X X 2.3.3

Call Alert X X 2.5.7

Call Response X X 2.5.4, 2.5.5

Displayed Information X 2.4.2

Emergency X X 2.5.10

High/Low Power X 2.4.10

Home Zone X X X 2.3.8

Keypad Lock X X X 2.3.5

Keypad Programming X 2.7

Message X X 2.5.8

Monitor X 2.4.4

Normal/Selective X 2.4.6

Phone X X 2.5.6

Priority X 2.4.12

Private Call X X 2.5.4, 2.5.5

Radio Wide Scan X X X 2.3.11

Repeater Talk-Around X 2.4.9

Scan X X X 2.3.11

Scan Edit X 2.4.11

Site Lock X 2.5.14

Site Search X 2.5.14

Status X X 2.5.9

Tones On-Off X X X 2.3.10

Zone X X X 2.3.7

TRANSCEIVER OPERATION

2-6

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

channel it can be programmed for times from 15

seconds up to 3 minutes, 45 seconds or disabled (not

used). If the transmitter is keyed continuously for

longer than the programmed time, the transmitter is

disabled and an invalid condition tone sounds. Five

seconds before time-out occurs, an alert tone sounds to

indicate that time-out is approaching. The timer and

tone are reset by releasing the PTT switch.

One use of this feature is to prevent a channel

from being kept busy for an extended period by an

accidentally keyed transmitter. It can also prevent

possible transmitter damage caused by transmitting for

an excessively long period. Conventional channels can

also be programmed with the Penalty and Conversa-

tion timers that are described in Sections 2.4.7 and

2.4.8.

2.3.10 TONE ENABLE/DISABLE

The supervisory tones (see Section 2.6) can be

enabled and disabled by the Tones On-Off option

switch if it is programmed. When tones are enabled by

this switch, “TONE ON” is momentarily displayed

and a tone sounds. Conversely, when tones are

disabled, “TONE OFF” is displayed and no tone

sounds. If the Tones On-Off option switch is not

programmed, tones are fixed in the on or off mode by

programming.

2.3.11 SCANNING

Introduction

Scanning cycles through a list of channels, called

a “scan list”, checking each for messages. When a

message is detected that your transceiver is

programmed to receive, scanning stops and the

message is received. Shortly after the message is

complete, scanning resumes (unless it has been

disabled).

There are two basic scan modes: Standard and

Radio Wide. The Standard mode is unique to the type

of channel selected (conventional or SMARTNET/

SmartZone), and the Radio Wide mode is the same

regardless of the channel type selected. Only one of

these scan modes can be enabled at a time. Therefore,

if standard scanning is enabled while radio wide scan-

ning is occurring, radio wide scanning is automatically

disabled and vice versa. More information on these

modes follows.

Standard Scanning

Standard scanning monitors only channels that

are the same type as that currently selected. There-

fore, if a conventional channel is selected, only

conventional channels are scanned, and if a

SMARTNET channel is selected, only SMARTNET

channels are scanned. Standard scanning is turned on

andoffbytheScanoptionswitchasfollows.Ifthis

switch is not programmed, standard scanning is not

available.

•To turn standard scanning on, press the Scan option

switch. Scanning is enabled when the “S”iconis

indicated in the upper left corner of the display and

SCAN x (conventional) or SCAN ON

(SMARTNET/SmartZone) is briefly displayed. The

“x” is the number of the conventional scan list (1, 2,

or 3) that is selected. Refer to Section 2.4.11 for

more information.

•To turn scanning off, press the Scan option switch

again. The “S” icon is then no longer indicated and

“SCAN OFF” is briefly displayed.

•If the zone or channel is changed while scanning is

selected, scanning continues on the same or a

different scan list (see scan list information which

follows).

Radio Wide Scanning

Radio wide scanning monitors the channels in the

preprogrammed radio wide scan list (see information

whichfollows).Thislistmaycontainupto16chan-

nels of any type (conventional or SMARTNET/Smart-

Zone) assigned to any zone. Radio wide scanning is

turned on and off by the Radio Wide Scan option

switch as follows. If this switch is not programmed,

radio wide scanning is not available.

•To turn radio wide scanning on, press the Radio

Wide Scan option switch. The icon is then

displayed continuously and “RWS ON” is displayed

briefly.

TRANSCEIVER OPERATION

2-7 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

•To turn radio wide scanning off, press the Radio

Wide Scan option switch again. The icon is

then no longer indicated and “RWS OFF” is

displayed briefly.

•If the zone or channel is changed while radio wide

scanning, radio wide scanning continues normally.

Scan Resume Delay

When a message is received or transmitted while

scanning, there is a programmable delay before scan-

ning resumes. The delay after receiving a call prevents

another message from being received before a

response can be made, and the delay after transmitting

a call ensures that a response is heard to your call

instead of another message occurring on some other

channel.

Standard Mode Scan List

NOTE: The selected channel is always scanned.

With conventional operation when using the full

keypad (15-key) model, up to three scan lists can be

programmed. The list that is scanned is selected by the

Scan option switch as described in Section 2.4.11.

Selecting another conventional channel does not

change the current scan list. In addition, the scan lists

are user programmable if the Scan Edit option switch

is programmed. With limited keypad (3-key) models,

only Scan List 1 can be scanned, and it is not user

programmable.

With SMARTNET/SmartZone operation, each

channel can be programmed so that one of up to three

different scan lists is automatically selected. Channels

can also be programmed so that scanning is automati-

cally disabled when they are selected. SMARTNET/

SmartZone scan lists are not user selectable or

programmable.

Radio Wide Mode Scan List

With radio wide scanning, there is only one

preprogrammed scan list available regardless of the

type of channel selected, and it is not user

programmable.

Determining Which Channels are in Scan List

Channels in the radio wide and standard

SMARTNET/SmartZone scan lists are not indicated.

With standard conventional scanning, the selected

channel is in the current scan list if the box icon

(around “S”) is indicated in the upper left corner of the

display.

Nuisance Channel Delete

With standard scanning, both conventional and

SMARTNET/SmartZone channels can be temporarily

deleted from the scan list. This feature is not available

with radio wide scanning. Proceed as follows:

NOTE: The selected channel and conventional priority

channels cannot be deleted from the scan list.

1. While receiving a message on the channel to be

deleted, press and hold the Scan option switch until

the alert tone sounds (about 1 second).

2. The channel is then deleted and scanning of the

remaining channels in the scan list resumes.

3. Deleted channels are added back into the scan list if

either of the following occur:

•Scanning is turned off and then on again using the

Scan switch.

•Transceiver power is turned off and then on again.

2.3.12 CONVENTIONAL AND SMARTNET/

SMARTZONE OPERATION

Introduction

Each selectable channel is programmable for

either conventional, SMARTNET, or SmartZone oper-

ation. For example, Zone 1/Channel 1 could be a

conventional channel, Zone 1/Channel 2 a

SMARTNET channel, and so on. More information on

these modes follows.

Conventional Operation

This is a non-trunked operating mode which

accesses independent radio channels (there is no auto-

matic access to several channels as with trunked oper-

TRANSCEIVER OPERATION

2-8

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

ation). Monitoring before transmitting may not occur

automatically in this mode, so the channel may have to

be manually monitored before transmitting (see

Section 2.4.3). Selecting a conventional channel

selects a transmit and receive frequency and other

parameters such as Call Guard squelch coding.

SMARTNET/SmartZone Operation

This is a trunked operating mode that uses ID

codes to select which mobiles are being called and

which calls are received. Monitoring is performed

automatically and special messages and tones indicate

busy and out-of-range conditions. Enhanced features

include roaming (SmartZone only), telephone, private,

and emergency calls, Call Alert, and messaging. Oper-

ating features unique to SMARTNET/SmartZone

channels are described in Section 2.5.

This radio supports only the SMARTNET II

trunking protocol. It does not support the SMARTNET

I (also referred to as Type I) protocol. When a

SMARTNET or SmartZone channel is selected or the

radio is powered up on a SMARTNET/SmartZone

channel, it searches for a control channel and attempts

to register on the radio system. Once a control channel

is found, the alias (name) of the selected channel is

displayed. If a control channel could not be found

(because of an out of range condition or the system ID

is not correct, for example), “NO SYS” is displayed

and the radio continues to search for a control channel.

The control channel transmits and receives

system information to and from all radios registered on

the system. Therefore, once a control channel is found,

it is continuously monitored for incoming call infor-

mation and is used to make call requests. The radio

automatically changes to a traffic channel to place and

receive calls and then returns to the control channel

when the call is complete.

2.4 CONVENTIONAL FEATURES

2.4.1 INTRODUCTION

The following information describes features

unique to the conventional operating mode (described

briefly in Section 2.1.2). Refer to Section 2.3 for infor-

mation on features common to all operating modes,

andtoSection2.5forinformationonfeaturesunique

to the SMARTNET/SmartZone mode.

2.4.2 DISPLAY MODE SELECTION

If the Displayed Information option switch is

programmed, the display mode used to indicate

conventional channels can be user selected. Pressing

this switch cycles between the following modes. The

selected mode does not change when power is turned

off. If the Displayed Information option switch is not

programmed, the Alias mode is always used.

Alias - The preprogrammed alphanumeric tag for the

channel is displayed.

Number - The channel number from 1-16 is

displayed.

Frequency - The receive frequency of the selected

channel is displayed in megahertz.

2.4.3 MONITORING BEFORE TRANSMITTING

With conventional operation, channels are moni-

tored automatically or manually as follows:

Automatic Channel Monitoring

If the selected channel is programmed for the

Busy Channel Lockout feature, monitoring is

performed automatically. Refer to the description of

this feature in Section 2.4.5 for more information.

Manual Channel Monitoring

The automatic monitoring just described may not

be programmed or it may occasionally disable the

transmitter even if the channel is not in use. In this

case, the channel must be monitored manually as

follows:

Rx Indicator - With scanning disabled, note if the

green RX indicator on the top panel is on. If it is not,

the channel is not being used and the call can be

transmitted. If it is on, a carrier is being detected, so

the channel may be busy (see next paragraph).

Monitor Mode - There may be times when the busy

indication is displayed even though no one is using

the channel. Monitoring should then be performed

by disabling Call Guard squelch using the Normal/

Selective option switch as described in Section

2.4.6 or the monitor mode described next.

TRANSCEIVER OPERATION

2-9 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

2.4.4 MONITOR MODE

The monitor mode temporarily disables squelch

control features (such as Call Guard squelch) so that

all messages are heard on the selected channel. It also

overrides the Busy Channel Lockout feature (see next

section) and temporarily halts scanning.

To monitor the selected transmit channel, select

the monitor mode by briefly pressing the Monitor

option switch (if available). The icon is displayed

and the receiver unsquelches (even if no carrier is

detected). To disable the monitor mode and return to

normal operation, press the Monitor switch a second

time.

To monitor the selected receive channel instead of

the transmit channel, press and hold the Monitor

switch until the alert tone sounds (approximately 1

second). This function may be useful, for example,

during weak signal conditions if intermittent

squelching makes a message difficult to understand.

2.4.5 BUSY CHANNEL LOCKOUT

The Busy Channel Lockout feature (also called

Transmit Disable On Busy) automatically disables the

transmitter if the channel is busy when the PTT switch

is pressed. When a busy condition is detected by this

feature, the transmitter is disabled, “BUSY” is indi-

cated in the lower part of the display, and a tone

similar to a standard telephone busy tone sounds until

the PTT switch is released. This feature is

programmed to operate in one of the following modes

on each channel:

Off - The transmitter keys even if the channel is busy.

Noise - The transmitter is disabled if any signal is

detected on the channel.

Tone - The transmitter is disabled if the detected

squelch coding is not correct.

If busy override is permitted by programming, it

is possible to transmit even when the transmitter is

disabled by this feature. Simply quickly release the

PTT switch and press it again.

2.4.6 CALL GUARD SQUELCH

General

Call Guard® squelch (also called CTCSS/DCS

signaling) can be programmed on conventional

channels. This feature eliminates distracting messages

intended for others using the channel by using a

subaudible tone or digital code to control the squelch.

This tone or code is unique to a user or talk group on

that channel. It is transmitted by the mobile placing a

call, and if Call Guard squelch is programmed in the

mobile receiving the call, it must detect the correct

tone or code to receive the call.

Call Guard Squelch Enable/Disable

To disable Call Guard (Selective) squelch so that

all messages on the selected or scanned channels are

heard, press the Normal/Selective option switch if

programmed. The receiver unsquelches only if a

carrier is detected. To re-enable Call Guard squelch,

press the Normal/Selective switch again.

When Call Guard squelch is disabled by this

switch, “SQ NORM” is flashed on the lower line of

the display, and when it is enabled, “SQ SLCT” is

flashed. The selected mode does not change when

other channels are selected or power is cycled. Call

Guard squelch can also be disabled by the monitor

mode described in Section 2.4.4.

Changing the Call Guard Code

If using the full keypad (15-key) model and the

ability to change Call Guard codes has been enabled

by programming, the transmit and receive codes from

one channel can be temporarily or permanently reas-

signed to all channels of the current zone. Proceed as

follows:

1. Using the number keys, enter the number of the

channel that is programmed with the code you want

to reassign to all channels (only channels 1-9 can be

selected). See Section 2.4.2 for information on how

to display channel numbers.

2. The display then briefly indicates “CODE x”, where

“x” is the key that was pressed. The codes assigned

TRANSCEIVER OPERATION

2-10

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

to that channel are then reassigned to all the other

channels in the current zone. The reassignments

remain in effect even after power is cycled.

3. To restore all Call Guard codes in the current zone

totheoriginalsettings,pressthe“0”key.

2.4.7 PENALTY TIMER

A penalty timer may be programmed on conven-

tional channels to prevent transmissions for a period of

time after the time-out timer described in Section 2.3.9

disables the transmitter. The penalty timer starts when

the PTT switch is released after the transmitter has

been disabled. If the PTT switch is pressed during the

penalty time, the time-out indication occurs again. A

beep sounds when the penalty timer expires and the

transmitter can then be keyed.

2.4.8 CONVERSATION TIMER

A conversation timer can be programmed on

conventional channels to limit the total length of a

conversation rather than just the length of each trans-

mission as with the time-out timer. This timer is reset

when the time between transmissions exceeds the

penalty time just described. A warning tone sounds 5

seconds before the conversation timer expires. When it

expires, the transmitter is disabled and a warning tone

sounds. The transmitter remains disabled for the

length of the penalty time, and a beep sounds when it

can be keyed again.

2.4.9 REPEATER TALK-AROUND

Normally, all transmissions go through a repeater

which usually increases range. However, if out of

range of the repeater, you cannot talk to anyone else on

that channel even though the mobile you are calling

may be only a short distance away. To allow communi-

cation when this situation occurs, repeater talk-around

can be used to transmit on the receive frequency. This

allows direct communication with a mobile without

going through a repeater.

Repeater talk-around can be selected if the

Repeater Talk-Around option switch is programmed.

When talk-around is enabled by this switch, the

icon is displayed and “RTA ON” is flashed in the

display. Then when it is disabled by pressing this

switch again, that icon is no longer displayed and

“RTA OFF” is flashed. Changing channels or turning

power off does not change the selected talk-around

mode.

2.4.10 POWER OUTPUT SELECT

If the High/Low Power option switch is

programmed and power selection is permitted on the

current channel by programming, either high or low

transmitter power can be selected. Generally, the high

power setting transmits longer distances but uses more

battery power, and the opposite occurs with the low

power setting. When the low power is selected on the

current channel, “LOW” is indicated continuously

near the bottom of the display.

Pressing the High/Low Power switch toggles the

power setting. The new level is flashed in the display

when this switch is pressed as “HI POWER” or “LO

POWER”. If power selection is not permitted on the

channel, the fixed power level is flashed and no power

change occurs. Turning power off or changing chan-

nels does not change the power setting selected for a

channel.

2.4.11 CONVENTIONAL MODE SCANNING

General

The following information describes scanning

features unique to conventional operation. Scan opera-

tion common to all modes is described in Section

2.3.11, and scan operation unique to SMARTNET/

SmartZone operation is described in Section 2.5.12.

Selecting a Scan List

When standard scanning with full keypad (15-

key) models, one of up to three scan lists can be

selected. These lists can be user programmed as

described in the information which follows. With

limited keypad (3-key) models, only one scan list is

available and is not user programmable. However,

nuisance channels can still be temporarily deleted as

described in Section 2.3.11.

Proceed as follows to select a scan list with full

keypad models:

TRANSCEIVER OPERATION

2-11 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

1. Press the Scan option switch to enable scanning.

The currently selected scan list is momentarily

indicated as “Scan x”, where “x” is the list number

(1-3).

2. To select one of the other lists, press the number key

corresponding to the desired list (1-3) and the

selected list is then momentarily displayed as “Scan

x”. The selected scan list is stored in memory and

does not change until this procedure is repeated.

Programming a Scan List

With full keypad (15-key) models, each of the

three scan lists is user programmable if the Scan Edit

option switch is programmed and user programming

of the list is allowed. Otherwise, the channels in these

lists are determined by dealer programming. User scan

list programming is not available with limited keypad

(3-key) models. Proceed as follows to program a scan

list:

1. Make sure all scanning is off (neither the standard

scan “S” icon or radio-wide scan icon is

displayed).

2. Press the Scan Edit option switch and then within 2

seconds press the number key corresponding to the

scan list you want to edit (1-3). If a list is not

selected within the allotted time, the last active

conventional standard scan list is automatically

selected. The selected list is indicated as “SCAN x”.

If user programming is disabled on a list, “NO

LIST” is momentarily displayed and it cannot be

edited.

3. Select the channel you want to add or delete using

the and keys. To change zones, press the F1

key and select the new zone.

4. If the selected channel is in the scan list, the box

around “S” is indicated in the upper left corner

of the display. To add the channel to the scan list,

press the “1” key, and to delete the channel, press the

“2” key.

NOTE: The priority channel cannot be deleted (see

Section 2.4.12).

5. To exit this mode and save the changes, press the

ENT or CLR key.

Transmitting in Scan Mode

Each conventional scan list can be programmed

for one of the following modes. These modes deter-

mine if priority sampling occurs and also the channel

on which transmissions occur while scanning. Refer to

the next section for more information.

No Priority - No priority channel sampling occurs

when the list is selected. The radio transmits on the

selected channel.

Priority/Tx Priority - Priority sampling occurs and

the priority channel is the one programmed in the

selected scan list. The radio transmits on the priority

channel.

Priority/Tx Selected - Priority sampling occurs and

the priority channel is the one programmed in the

selected scan list. The radio transmits on the selected

channel.

Priority on Selected - The priority channel is always

the selected channel. The radio transmits on the

selected channel.

Talkback - No priority sampling occurs. The radio

transmits on the channel of a call while scanning is

halted. Then once scanning resumes, it transmits on

the selected channel.

2.4.12 PRIORITY CHANNEL SAMPLING

General

The priority channel sampling feature ensures

that when standard scanning, messages on the priority

channel are not missed while listening to a message on

some other channel. The transceiver can be

programmed so that the priority channel is a fixed

channel associated with the current scan list, the

currently selected channel, or not used (see preceding

section). When the selected channel is a priority

channel, “P” is indicated in the upper right part of the

display.

Priority channel sampling occurs only with Stan-

dard conventional scanning. It does not occur with

Radio Wide scanning, when listening to any type of

SMARTNET/SmartZone call, or when transmitting. A

series of “ticks” may be heard when the priority

TRANSCEIVER OPERATION

2-12

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

channel is sampled while listening to a message on

some other channel.

The priority sampling times are programmed by

the following parameters:

Lookback Time A - This time determines how often

the priority channel is checked for activity. Times of

0.25-4.00 seconds in 0.25-second steps can be

programmed.

Lookback Time B - This time determines how often

the priority channel is checked once an incorrect Call

Guard (CTCSS/DCS) code is detected. Since it takes

much longer to detect an incorrect Call Guard signal

than a carrier, this time should be relatively long to

prevent the interruptions from making a message diffi-

cult to understand. Times of 0.5-8.0 seconds can be

programmedin0.5-secondsteps.

Changing The Priority Channel

If a specific priority channel is associated with

the current scan list, it can be changed if the Priority

option switch is programmed. Proceed as follows:

1. Make sure all scanning is off (neither the standard

scan “S” icon nor radio-wide scan icon

displayed).

2. Select the channel that you want to be the priority

channel using the channel selector switch on the top

panel. If the channel is in a different zone, also select

the appropriate zone.

3. Press the Priority option switch and the “P”iconis

displayed to indicate that the selected channel is

now the priority channel.

2.4.13 STANDARD CONVENTIONAL CALLS

Standard conventional calls are calls to or from

other mobile units on the selected channel. The proper

coded Call Guard signaling (see Section 2.4.6) may

need to be transmitted for them to receive your call

and also for you to receive their calls. Proceed as

follows to place and receive these calls:

Placing a Standard Conventional Call

1. Turn power on and set the volume as described in

Section 2.3.2. Select the channel programmed for

the mobile you want to call (see Section 2.3.7).

2. Monitor the channel automatically or manually as

described in Section 2.4.3.

3. Press the PTT switch and the call proceeds as

follows:

•If the Busy Channel Lockout feature is

programmed on the channel, the transmitter is

automatically disabled if the channel is busy (see

Section 2.4.5).

•Otherwise, busy and out-of-range conditions are

not indicated and speaking can begin after moni-

toring the channel.

4. Press (and hold) the PTT switch to talk and release

it to listen.

Receiving a Standard Conventional Call

1. Select or scan the channel programmed for the call

you want to receive (refer to Sections 2.3.11 and

2.4.11 for more scanning information).

2. When the call is received, press the PTT switch to

talk and release it to listen. If scanning, you may

have to respond before scanning resumes to ensure

that the response occurs on the channel of the call.

2.4.14 DTMF/ANI SIGNALING

DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency) tones can

be generated manually or automatically for ANI

(Automatic Number Identification) and other

purposes. The following options may be enabled by

dealer programming for each conventional channel:

DTMF Keypad - With full keypad (15-key) models

only, pressing 0-9, , or # on the keypad while

holding the PTT switch transmits the corresponding

tone until the key is released.

Pre-Tx ANI - A preprogrammed ANI sequence is

automatically sent when you press the PTT switch.

TRANSCEIVER OPERATION

2-13 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

Post-TX ANI - A preprogrammed ANI sequence is

automatically sent each time you release the PTT

switch.

Disabled - All DTMF signaling is disabled.

2.5 SMARTNET/SMARTZONE FEATURES

2.5.1 INTRODUCTION

The following information describes features

unique to the SMARTNET and SmartZone operating

modes described briefly in Section 2.3.12. Refer to

Section 2.3 for information on features common to all

operating modes, and to Section 2.4 for information on

features unique to the conventional mode.

2.5.2 VIEWING UNIT ID

Each radio in a SMARTNET system is identified

with a system ID and Unit ID. To display the Unit ID,

make sure that a SMARTNET channel is selected and

then turn power off and then on again. The software

version number, current zone, and Unit ID are then

displayed in sequence. The six-digit Unit ID is

displayed as IDxxxxxx.

2.5.3 STANDARD GROUP CALLS

Standard group calls are between you and another

mobile, group of mobiles, or a control station (a radio

at a fixed location). Most calls you make will probably

be this type.

Placing a Standard Group Call

1. Turn power on and set the volume as described in

Section 2.3.2. Select the channel programmed for

the talk group you want to call (see Section 2.3.7).

A regular or announcement talk group can be

selected.

2. Press the PTT switch and when the alert tone

sounds, begin talking. Other indications that may

occur are as follows:

•If the busy tone sounds and “BUSY” is displayed,

the system is busy. Release the PTT switch and

wait for the call back tone to sound. Then press

the PTT switch within 3 seconds and begin

talking.

•If the radio system cannot be accessed within 500

ms of pressing the PTT switch, a continuous tone

sounds until the system is accessed or the PTT

switch is released.

•If your unit ID is invalid, the call is being made to

an invalid group ID, or group calls are not

allowed, “INVALID ID” is displayed and an alert

tone sounds.

Receiving a Standard Call

Group calls are automatically received if a

SMARTNET/SmartZone channel is selected. The

display continues to indicate the selected channel alias

(name) when a call is received.

2.5.4 ENHANCED PRIVATE CONVERSATION

CALLS

General

Private calls allow you to place a call to a specific

mobile unit. Either the Enhanced Private Conversa-

tion™ or Private Conversation II™ modes may be

programmed depending on the capabilities of the radio

system. The Enhanced Private Conversation mode is

described in the following information, and the Private

Conversation II mode is described in Section 2.5.5.

The Private Call option switch is required to

place these calls, and either that switch or the Call

Response option switch is required to receive them.

Proceed as follows.

Placing an Enhanced Private Conversation Call

This call can be initiated by selecting the unit ID

from a call list (list entry) or by directly entering it

using the keypad (direct entry). Direct entry is avail-

able with full keypad (15-key) models only. Proceed

as follows:

List Entry Method (All Models)

1. With a SMARTNET/SmartZone channel selected,

momentarily press the Private Call option switch.

The private call mode is indicated by “C”inthe

upper part of the display. The tag (alias) of the last

ID called is displayed if it matches an ID in your call

list. Otherwise, the last ID called is displayed.

TRANSCEIVER OPERATION

2-14

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

2. Enter the index of the desired ID if you know it or

scroll through the list using the and keys

until you find the desired ID. Press the CLR key to

cancel the call.

3. Press the PTT switch or the ENT key to initiate the

call. The display then indicates the alias of the desti-

nation radio. Proceed to the bulleted list following

the next method for conditions that may occur next.

Direct Entry Method (Full Keypad Models Only)

1. With a SMARTNET/SmartZone channel selected,

press and hold the Private Call option switch until a

tone sounds (approximately 1 second). The last ID

called is displayed, and the private call mode is indi-

cated by “C” in the upper part of the display.

2. Using the 0-9 keys, enter the 6-digit ID of the

mobile unit you are calling. Press the key to

erase the last digit entered or press the CLR key to

cancel the call.

3. Press the PTT switch or the ENT key to initiate the

call. If the entered ID is invalid, “INVALID” is

momentarily displayed and the call is not initiated.

If the entered ID is valid, the display indicates the

alias of the ID if it matches an ID in your call list.

Otherwise, the ID you entered continues to be

displayed. Any of the following conditions may

then occur:

•If the radio you are calling is on the air, telephone

type “ringing” is heard for 20 seconds or until the

called party answers.

•If the called party answers and the call is

successful, the person’s voice is heard and the call

is carried on the same as a group call. To end the

call at any time, press the CLR key.

•If the called party does not answer within 20

seconds, “NO ANSWR” is displayed and a

continuous tone sounds. End the call by pressing

the CLR key.

•If the called radio is not in service, no ringing is

heard, “NO ACK” is displayed, and a continuous

tone sounds. End the call by pressing the CLR

key.

•If neither your radio nor the radio being called is

authorized to make unit-to-unit calls, “REJECT”

is displayed and a continuous tone sounds. End

the call by pressing the CLR key.

•If the called party answers but the radio system is

busy, four low tones sound and “BUSY” and

“WAIT” are alternately displayed. When the

system is no longer busy, the called party auto-

matically responds.

•If an out-of-range condition exists or the radio

system is not in service, “LOST CALL” is

displayed and a continuous tone sounds. End the

call by pressing the CLR key.

Receiving an Enhanced Private Conversation Call

These calls are automatically received if a

SMARTNET/SmartZone channel is selected. Proceed

as follows:

1. When a call is received, a recurring unit call tone

(three beeps) sounds for up to 20 seconds, and

“CALL RCV” and the current channel alias are

alternately displayed.

2. To answer the call, press the Private Call option

switch and then the PTT switch and begin talking.

The private call mode is indicated by “C”inthe

upper part of the display. The alias of the incoming

call is displayed if the ID is in your call list. Other-

wise, the unit ID is displayed. NOTE: If the Private

Call option switch is not pressed before the PTT

switch, a group call is transmitted on the selected

group.

•To end the call when the conversation is complete

or at any other time, press the CLR key.

•If unit-to-unit (private) calls are not permitted

(Private Call switch not programmed), press the

Call Response option switch, if available, to

answer the call.

•If the call is not answered within 20 seconds, it is

automatically terminated.

•If the radio system is busy, four low tones sound

and “BUSY” and “WAIT” are alternately

TRANSCEIVER OPERATION

2-15 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

displayed. When the system is no longer busy, the

call back tone (four beeps) is heard and your radio

automatically starts transmitting. Press the PTT

switchtocontinuethecall.

•To ignore an incoming call, press the CLR key or

wait 20 seconds until the recurring unit call tone

stops sounding. NOTE:IftheCLRkeyis

programmed for the Call function, it will not clear

the call.

2.5.5 PRIVATE CONVERSATION II CALLS

General

Private calls allow you to place a call to a specific

mobile unit. Either the Enhanced Private Conversa-

tion™ or Private Conversation II™ modes may be

programmed depending on the capabilities of the radio

system. Operation in the Enhanced Private Conversa-

tion mode was described in Section 2.5.4, and opera-

tion in the Private Conversation II mode is described

in the following information.

The Private Call option switch is required to

place these calls, and either that switch or the Call

Response option switch is required to receive them.

Proceed as follows.

Placing a Private Conversation II Call

This call can be initiated by selecting the unit ID

from a call list (list entry) or by directly entering it

using the keypad (direct entry). Direct entry is avail-

able with full keypad (15-key) models only. Proceed

as follows:

List Entry Method (All Models)

1. With a SMARTNET/SmartZone channel selected,

momentarily press the Private Call option switch.

The private call mode is indicated by “C”inthe

upper part of the display. The tag (alias) of the last

ID called is displayed if it matches an ID in your call

list. Otherwise, the last ID called is displayed.

2. Enter the index of the desired ID if you know it or

scroll through the list using the and keys

until you find the desired ID. Press the CLR key to

cancel the call.

3. Press the PTT switch to initiate the call. The display

then indicates the alias of the destination radio. Wait

approximately 1 second and then begin talking.

Proceed to the bulleted list which follows the next

method for conditions that may then occur.

Direct Entry Method (Full Keypad Models Only)

1. With a SMARTNET/SmartZone channel selected,

press and hold the Private Call option switch until a

tone sounds (approximately 1 second). The last ID

called is displayed and the private call mode is indi-

cated by “C” in the upper part of the display.

2. Using the 0-9 keys, enter the 6-digit ID of the unit

you are calling. Press the key to erase the last

digit entered or press the CLR key to cancel the call.

3. Press the PTT switch to initiate the call. If the

entered ID is invalid, “INVALID” is momentarily

displayed and the call is not initiated. If the entered

ID is valid, the display indicates the alias of the ID

if it matches an ID in your call list. Otherwise, the

ID you entered continues to be displayed. Wait

approximately 1 second and then begin talking. Any

of the following conditions may then occur.

•If the called party answers and the call is

successful, the person’s voice is heard and the call

iscarriedonthesameasagroupcall.Toendthe

call at any time, press the CLR key.

•If the radio system is busy, four low tones sound

and the “BUSY” and “WAIT” are alternately

displayed. When the system is no longer busy, the

call back tone (four beeps) is heard and a channel

is automatically acquired. Press the PTT switch to

continue the call.

Receiving a Private Conversation II Call

Unit-to-unit calls are automatically received if a

SMARTNET/SmartZone channel is selected. Proceed

as follows:

1. When a call is received, an alert tone sounds and the

caller’s voice is heard. While voice is heard, “C”is

indicated in the upper part of the display and “CALL

RCV” and the current channel alias are alternately

displayed.

TRANSCEIVER OPERATION

2-16

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

2. To answer the call, press the Private Call option

switch and then the PTT switch and begin talking.

The private call mode is indicated by “C”inthe

upper part of the display. The alias of the incoming

call is displayed if the ID is in your call list. Other-

wise, the unit ID is displayed. NOTE: If the Private

Call option switch is not pressed before the PTT

switch, a group call is transmitted on the selected

group.

•To end the call when the conversation is complete

or at any other time, press the CLR key. If the call

is not answered within 20 seconds, it is automati-

cally terminated.

•If private calls are not permitted (Private Call

switch not programmed), press the Call Response

option switch, if available, to answer the call.

2.5.6 TELEPHONE CALLS

General

Telephone calls allow calls to be placed and

received over the public telephone system using the

transceiver. If the transceiver is programmed for tele-

phone calls (Phone option switch programmed), they

are placed and received as follows:

Placing a Telephone Call

Telephone calls can be placed by selecting the

number from a preprogrammed phone number list (list

entry) or by directly entering it using the keypad

(direct entry). Direct entry is available with full

keypad (15-key) models only. Proceed as follows:

List Entry Method (All Models)

1. With a SMARTNET/SmartZone channel selected,

momentarily press the Phone option switch. The

phone mode is indicated by the icon, and the

display indicates the alias of the last called tele-

phone number if it is in your phone number list.

Otherwise, the last called telephone number is

displayed.

2. Enter the index of the desired telephone number if

you know it or scroll through the list using the

and keys until you find the desired number.

Press the CLR key to cancel the call.

3. Press the PTT switch or the ENT key to initiate the

call. The display indicates “WAIT” while the

connection to the phone system is occurring. Once

connected, the normal dial tone is heard and the

alias of the number being called is displayed. The

radio then automatically dials the telephone number

and the normal ringing or busy tone is heard.

Proceed to the bulleted list which follows the next

method for conditions that may then occur.

Direct Entry Method (Full Keypad Models Only)

1. With a SMARTNET/SmartZone channel selected,

press and hold the Phone option switch until a tone

sounds (approximately 1 second). The last phone

number called is displayed, and the phone mode is

indicated by the icon.

2. Enter the number using the 0-9 and #keys. To dial

a character, press F1 and then the key. To

enter a pause (indicated by “P”), press the F1, ,

and then #keys. The number scrolls to the left in the

display so that the seven right-most digits are

always displayed. Numbers up to 16 digits

(including pauses) can be entered. Press the CLR

keytocancelthecall.

3. Press the PTT switch or the ENT key to initiate the

call. The display indicates “WAIT” while the

connection to the phone system is occurring. Once

connected, the normal dial tone is heard and the

alias of the number being called is displayed. The

radio then automatically dials the telephone number

and the normal ringing or busy tone is heard. Any of

the following conditions may then occur.

•After the called party answers, press the PTT

switch to talk and release it to listen. You cannot

talk and listen at the same time because the radio

cannot transmit and receive at the same time.

Each time the PTT switch is released, a tone is

heard by the other party that indicates when a

response can be made. To end the call when the

conversation is complete or at any other time,

press the CLR key.

•If enabled by dealer programming, a number can

be dialed during a call by simply holding down

the PTT switch and dialing the number.

TRANSCEIVER OPERATION

2-17 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

•If an out-of-range condition exists or the radio

system is not in service, “LOST CALL” is

displayed and a continuous tone sounds. End the

call by pressing the CLR key.

•If you are not authorized to make telephone calls,

“REJECT” is displayed and a continuous tone

sounds. End the call by pressing the CLR key.

•If the radio system is busy, “BUSY” is displayed

and a busy tone sounds. The call automatically

proceeds when the radio system becomes avail-

able. If the call is ended before it proceeds, your

position in queue is lost.

Answering a Telephone Call

Telephone calls are automatically received if a

SMARTNET/SmartZone channel is selected. Proceed

as follows:

1. When a telephone call is received, “ringing” similar

to a standard telephone is heard. The display alter-

nately indicates “PHONE” and the current channel

alias.

2. To answer the call, press the Phone option switch

and the phone mode is indicated by the icon.

Press the PTT switch to talk and release it to listen.

3. To end the call when the conversation is complete or

at any other time, press the CLR key. Also press the

CLR key to ignore an incoming call and end it

without answering. NOTE: If the CLR key is

programmed for the Phone function, it will not clear

the call.

2.5.7 CALL ALERT

The Call Alert™ feature allows pages to be sent

and received. Proceed as follows:

Sending a Page

Pages can be placed by selecting the unit ID from

a preprogrammed list (list entry) or by directly

entering it using the keypad (direct entry). Direct entry

is available with full keypad (15-key) models only.

List Entry Method (All Models)

1. With a SMARTNET/SmartZone channel selected,

momentarily press the Call Alert option switch. The

tag (alias) of the last ID called is displayed if it

matches an ID in your call list. Otherwise, the last

ID called is displayed.

2. Enter the index of the desired ID if you know it or

scroll through the list using the and keys

until you find the desired ID. Press the CLR key to

cancel the call.

3. Press the PTT switch or the ENT keytosendthe

page. The display then indicates the alias of the

radio being paged. Proceed to the bulleted list which

follows the next method for conditions that may

then occur.

Direct Entry Method (Full Keypad Models Only)

1. With a SMARTNET/SmartZone channel selected,

press and hold the Call Alert option switch until a

tone sounds (approximately 1 second). The last ID

called or paged is displayed.

2. Using the 0-9 keys, enter the 6-digit ID of the unit

you are calling. Press the key to erase the last

digit entered or press the CLR key to cancel the

page.

3. Press the PTT switch or the ENT keytosendthe

page. If the entered ID is invalid, “INVALID” is

momentarily displayed and the page is not sent. If

the entered ID is valid, the display indicates the alias

of the ID if it matches an ID in your call list. Other-

wise, the ID you entered continues to be displayed.

The page is then sent and any of the following

conditions may then occur.

•If the radio you are paging is on the air and received

your page, a signaling success tone (six beeps)

sounds and the display momentarily indicates

“ACK RCVD”. The alias of the selected channel is

then displayed continuously.

•If the radio you are paging is not in service, a tone

sounds and “NO ACK” is displayed. Press the CLR

key to cancel the page.

TRANSCEIVER OPERATION

2-18

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

Answering a Page

1. When a page is received, the display alternately

indicates “PAGE RCV” and the alias of the current

channel and a recurring received page tone sounds

(six beeps) sounds.

2. To clear and ignore the page, press the CLR key.

NOTE: If the CLR key is programmed for the

Private Call function, it will not clear the page.

3. Answering a page is the same as placing a private

call. Therefore, press the Private Call option switch

and follow the instructions for placing a private call

in Sections 2.5.4 or 2.5.5, whichever is applicable.

2.5.8 MESSAGING

The messaging feature allows preprogrammed

messages to be sent to your dispatcher. Up to 16

messages can be preprogrammed, and they are identi-

fied by a tag (alias). If a Message option switch is

programmed, messages are sent as follows:

1. Momentarily press the Message option switch. The

alias of the last message sent is displayed.

2. Enter the index of the desired message if you know

it or scroll through the list using the and

keys until you find the desired message. Press the

CLR key to cancel the message.

3. Press the PTT switch or the ENT keytosendthe

message. When the message is received and

acknowledged by the dispatcher, a signaling success

tone (six beeps) sounds and the display returns to the

normal channel indication. If there is no acknowl-

edgment after 6 seconds, a tone sounds and “NO

ACK” is displayed. Press the CLR keytoreturnto

normal operation.

2.5.9 SENDING STATUS CONDITIONS

The status feature allows the current status to be

sent to a dispatcher. Up to eight status conditions can

be preprogrammed, and they are identified by an alias

(name). If the Status option switch is programmed,

status conditions are sent as follows:

1. Momentarily press the Status option switch. The

alias of the last status sent is displayed.

2. To change the displayed status, enter the index of the

desired status if you know it or scroll through the list

using the and keys untilyou find thedesired

status. Press the CLR key to cancel this function.

3. Press the PTT switch or the ENT keytosendthe

status. When the message is received and acknowl-

edged by the dispatcher, a signaling success tone

(six beeps) sounds and the display returns to the

normal channel indication. If there is no acknowl-

edgment after 6 seconds, a tone sounds and “NO

ACK” is displayed. Press the CLR key to return to

normal operation.

2.5.10 EMERGENCY ALARM AND CALL

Introduction

Emergency Alarms and Calls are separate func-

tions that can be individually enabled or disabled on

each SMARTNET/SmartZone system. The Emergency

option switch is also required for these functions, and

it is always the lower button (FCN) on the side when it

is used. Emergency Alarms and Calls are transmitted

on the emergency talk group programmed on the

selected system.

Emergency Alarms

An emergency alarm is a special data transmis-

sion that alerts a dispatcher of an emergency situation.

Proceed as follows to activate an emergency alarm:

1. Select a SMARTNET/SmartZone channel that has

this feature enabled and then press the Emergency

option switch. The radio then begins automatically

transmitting an emergency alarm data message and

“EMERGNCY” is indicated in the display for 3

seconds.

2. When the emergency alarm is acknowledged, the

emergency acknowledge tone (two beeps) sounds.

Silent operation may also be programmed in which

case no tone sounds and there is no indication that

an acknowledgment occurred.

3. The radio continues to transmit this message until an

acknowledgment is received or the programmed

number of attempts have been made. To exit this

mode, power must be turned off and then on again.

TRANSCEIVER OPERATION

2-19 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

Emergency Calls

An emergency call urgently requests access to a

voice channel. To place this call, proceed as follows:

1. Select a SMARTNET/SmartZone channel that has

this feature enabled and press the Emergency option

switch. The emergency mode is indicated when

“EMERGNCY” is indicated in the display for 3

seconds.

2. To place the emergency call, manually press the

PTT switch and begin speaking as with a standard

call. All group calls which follow are then emer-

gency calls (private, telephone, and call alert calls

are not allowed). If the channel is changed, the call

is made on the emergency talk group programmed

for the new channel.

3. To exit this mode, power must be turned off and then

on again.

2.5.11 FAILSOFT OPERATION

If a failure occurs in the SMARTNET/Smart-

Zone system so that it cannot be used, the transceiver

automatically enters the failsoft mode. When this

mode is selected, the display alternately indicates

“FAILSOFT” and the alias of the selected channel.

When in the failsoft mode, operation is in the

conventional mode on a preprogrammed failsoft

channel. If a transmission is attempted before a failsoft

channel is located, a continuous tone sounds until the

PTT switch is released. When the radio system returns

to normal operation, this condition is automatically

detected and normal operation resumes.

2.5.12 SMARTNET/SMARTZONE SCANNING

Scanning on a SMARTNET/Smartzone channel

is similar to the standard scanning described in Section

2.3.11.Eachchannelcanbeprogrammedwitha

different scan list that includes up to 16 channels, one

of which can be a priority channel.

Scanning is enabled/disabled by the Scan option

switch. In addition, channels can be programmed so

that scanning automatically starts whenever the

channel is selected. Scanning is temporarily disabled

and “S” turns off if a channel is selected that has scan-

ning disabled. Then when a channel is selected again

that permits scanning, it is automatically re-enabled.

In addition to calls on channels in the scan list,

pages, private calls, and telephone calls are received

while scanning. Messages on the priority channel are

received while listening to lower priority messages.

However, private and telephone calls are not inter-

rupted by calls on the priority channel.

2.5.13 DYNAMIC REGROUPING

The dynamic regrouping feature allows a

dispatcher to switch users to a dynamically defined

channel to receive an important message. Dynamic

regrouping operates as follows:

1. When this command is received, the alternating

dynamic regrouping tone sounds, the transceiver

automatically changes to the regrouping channel,

and the display alternately indicates “REGROUP”

and the alias of the selected channel. All transmit-

ting and receiving then occurs on this channel.

2. To reset all talk and announcement groups to normal

so that only the designated regrouping channel is on

the dynamic group, manually select the designated

regrouping channel if you know it. If this channel is

not selected or there is no designated regrouping

channel, all transmissions occur on the dynamically

assigned group regardless of which channel is

selected, and the regrouping tone sounds each time

the PTT switch is pressed.

3. When regrouping is canceled by the dispatcher,

transceiver operation returns to normal.

2.5.14 SMARTZONE FEATURES

Introduction

As described in Section 2.3.12, the SmartZone®

mode provides wide area coverage by allowing

roaming between SMARTNET and conventional sites.

SmartZone operation is the same as SMARTNET with

the following additional features:

Determining Current Site

To determine the current radio site, momentarily

press the Site Search option switch (if programmed). If

TRANSCEIVER OPERATION

2-20

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

currently registered on a site, “SITE x” is displayed,

where“x”isthesitenumber.Ifthesiteislocked(see

following), “LOCK x” is displayed instead. The

display then indicates the RSSI (Receive Signal

Strength Indicator) value of the current site as “RSSI

x” and then returns to displaying the channel alias.

Searching For a New Site

To display the RSSI level of the current site, press

the Site Search option switch (if programmed). The

current site number is then displayed as “SITE x”

followed by the RSSI level as “RSSI x”. If the Site

Search option switch is not pressed again, this mode is

automatically exited and the normal channel informa-

tion again displayed.

To scroll through the other programmed sites,

repeatedly press the Site Search option switch while

“SITE x” or “RSSI x” is displayed. Each time it is

pressed, the information for the next site is displayed.

To select the displayed site, simply do not press the

switch again and that site is selected when the normal

channel display returns. If site lock is on when site

search is entered (see following), the radio will be

locked on the new site when this function is exited.

Locking/Unlocking a Site

It is sometimes desirable to stay on the current

site regardless of signal level. To lock the radio on the

current site so that it does not search for another, press

the Site Lock option switch (if programmed). The

display then momentarily indicates “LOCK x” to indi-

cate that the current site is locked (“x” is the current

site number). To unlock the site, press the Lock switch

again and “UNLOCK” is momentarily displayed.

When locked on a site, it is still possible to search

for a different site using the site search function

described in the preceding section. When a new site is

found, the radio is then locked on that site.

2.6 SUPERVISORY TONES

Single Beep (Alert Tone)

•Power was turned on and a successful power-up

sequence occurred (Section 2.3.2).

•The time-out timer is about to expire or the penalty

timer has expired (Sections 2.3.9 and 2.4.7).

•The conversation timer is about to expire (Section

2.4.8).

•The system received your page but the pagedmobile

is not on the air (Section 2.5.7).

•Telephone interconnect is not operational (Section

2.5.6).

Continuous Tone (Invalid or No Acknowledge

Condition)

•A transmission is being attempted on an unpro-

grammed channel or a conventional channel

programmed as receive-only.

•The transmitter is disabled by the busy channel

lockout feature (Section 2.4.5).

•The transmitter has been disabled by the time-out

timer feature (Section 2.3.9).

•The transmitter has been disabled by the conversa-

tion timer (Section 2.4.8).

•An out-of-range condition exists (SMARTNET/

SmartZone only).

•A transmission is being attempted before the penalty

timer has expired (Section 2.4.7).

•Dynamic regrouping has been exited but the

dynamic regrouping channel is still selected

(Section 2.5.13).

•The paged mobile did not acknowledge the page

(Section 2.5.7).

•The message that was sent has not been acknowl-

edged (Section 2.5.8).

•The status condition that was sent has not been

acknowledged (Section 2.5.9).

Single Short Medium-Pitch Tone

•A valid key has been pressed.

Single Short Low-Pitch Tone

•An invalid key has been pressed.

Six Beeps (Recurring)

•The page was received (Section 2.5.7).

Three Beeps (Recurring)

•A unit-to-unit call was received (Section 2.5.4).

TRANSCEIVER OPERATION

2-21 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

Six Beeps

•The paged radio received the page and acknowl-

edged it (Section 2.5.7).

•The message that was sent has been received and

acknowledged (Section 2.5.8).

•The status condition that was sent has been received

and acknowledged (Section 2.5.9).

Two Beeps

•The emergency alarm condition was acknowledged

(Section 2.5.10).

Gurgle-Like Tone

•Dynamic regrouping has occurred (Section 2.5.13).

•Dynamic regrouping has occurred but the

regrouping channel is not selected (Section 2.5.13).

Four Low Tones (Busy Signal)

•The radio system is busy or a busy condition exists

when making a telephone call.

Four Alternating High and Low Tones

•A channel is available after a busy condition

occurred (SMARTNET/SmartZone only).

2.7 KEYPAD PROGRAMMING

2.7.1 INTRODUCTION

NOTE: Keypad programming is available with full

keypad (15-key) models only.

Keypad programming is available if the Keypad

Programming option switch is programmed. It is then

selected by simply pressing this switch (no password

is required). Keypad programming allows conven-

tional channel parameters such as the transmit and

receive frequency and Call Guard squelch code to be

changed. In addition, it allows several conventional

mode timers to be changed. It cannot be used to repro-

gram disabled channels or SMARTNET/SmartZone

channels.

2.7.2 MENU DESCRIPTION

A menu is used to select parameters to be

changed in the keypad programming mode. When the

Keypad Programming mode is selected by pressing the

option switch, the “P”and“

G” icons are displayed

(see Figure 2-3) along with the first menu parameter

“ZONE CHG”.

The four main menu parameters are listed below,

and descriptions are located in the indicated section.

Press the and keys to display the desired

parameter and then press the ENT key to select it.

Pressing the CLR key in any of the four main menus

exits the keypad programming mode. Pressing it in the

other menus returns to the previous menu. A flowchart

showing the keypad programming mode menu struc-

ture is located in Figure 2-4.

•ZONE CHG (2.7.3)

•CHAN CHG (2.7.4)

•SYS PRM (2.7.5)

•CHAN PRM (2.7.6)

Figure 2-4 Keypad Programming Menu

Flowchart

2.7.3 ZONE CHANGE PARAMETER

The “ZONE CHG” menu parameter selects the

zone containing the conventional channel to be repro-

grammed. It does not change the zone selected for

normal operation. Enter the zone number or scroll

through the programmed zones by pressing the

and keys. When the desired zone is displayed,

select it by pressing the ENT key.

Zone Channel

Change

System

Parameters

Channel

Parameters

Select

Zone

Select

Channel

Scan Hold Timer

Time-Out Timer

Penalty Timer

Conver. Timer

Rx Freq

Tx Freq

Rx CG Code

Tx CG Code

Tx Power

TOT On-Off

TRANSCEIVER OPERATION

2-22

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

2.7.4 CHANNEL CHANGE PARAMETER

The “CHAN CHG” menu parameter selects the

conventional channel to be reprogrammed. Disabled or

SMARTNET/SmartZone channels cannot be selected.

This does not change the channel selected for normal

operation.

Enter the channel number or scroll through the

programmed channels by pressing the and

keys. When the desired channel is displayed, select it

by pressing the ENT key.

2.7.5 SYSTEM PARAMETERS

The “SYS PRM” menu parameter selects the

conventional mode timer to be reprogrammed (see

following). Press the and keys to display the

desired timer and then press the ENT keytoselectit.

SCAN TMR - Selects the Scan Hold timer. Press

the and keys to decrement/increment the

timer in 0.5-second steps, and press the “0” key to

disable the timer (set it to 0 seconds). When the

desired value is displayed, store it by pressing the

ENT key.

TX TMR - Selects the transmit time-out timer.

Press the and keys to decrement/increment

the timer in 15-second steps, and press the “0” key

to disable the timer (set it to 0 seconds). When the

desired value is displayed, press the ENT key to

store it.

PEN TMR - Selects the penalty timer. Press the

and keys to decrement/increment the timer

in 15-second steps, and press the “0” key to disable

the timer (set it to 0 seconds). When the desired

value is displayed, store it by pressing the ENT

key.

CONV TMR - Selects the conversation timer.

Press the and keys to decrement/increment

the timer in 30-second steps, and press the “0” key

to disable the timer (set it to 0 seconds). When the

desired value is displayed, store it by pressing the

ENT key.

2.7.6 CHANNEL PARAMETERS

The “CHAN PRM” menu parameter selects the

conventional channel parameter to be reprogrammed

(see following). Press the and keys to display

the desired parameter and then press the ENT key to

select it.

RX FREQ - Selects the receive channel frequency.

Press the and keys to move the cursor left

and right, and press the 0-9 keys to enter a digit.

When the desired frequency is displayed, store it

by pressing the ENT key.

TX FREQ - Same as RX FREQ above.

RX CODE - Selects the receive Call Guard

(CTCSS/DCS) code. Press the “0” key to display

the first available code, and press it again to toggle

between types (CTCSS and DCS). Press the

and keys to scroll through the available codes.

When the desired code is displayed, store it by

pressing the ENT key.

TX CODE - Same as RX CODE above.

TX POWER - Selects the desired power output

level. Press the and keys to scroll through

the following choices. When the desired setting is

displayed, store it by pressing the ENT key.

•POWER HI - High transmit power

•POWERLO-Lowtransmitpower

•POWER SW - Switchable power selectable by

the High/Low power switch. This choice is not

available if that switch is not programmed.

TX TMR - Enables or disables the time-out timer

on the current channel. Press the and keys

to toggle between the on and off mode, and when

the desired setting is displayed, store it by pressing

the ENT key.

3-1 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

TRANSCEIVER PROGRAMMING

SECTION 3 TRANSCEIVER PROGRAMMING

Figure 3-1 Programming Setup

Remote Programming Interface (RPI)

Part No. 023-9800-000

RPI-Transceiver

Programming Cable

Part No. 597-2002-123

3.1 GENERAL

3.1.1 PROGRAMMING SETUP

The following items are required to program the

transceiver and control unit. The part numbers of this

equipment are shown in Table 1-1 in Section 1. The

programming set-up is shown above.

•IBM® PC or compatible personal computer

•Remote Prog. Interface (RPI) P.N. 023-9800-000

•Cables from the RPI to the computer and

transceiver

•EFJohnson PCTrunk programming software.

3.1.2 COMPUTER DESCRIPTION

The computer used to run this program should

meet the following minimum requirements:

•Windows® 3.1, 95/98, or NT 3.51

•Intel® 486 processor or equivalent

•At least 4 MB of RAM

•A hard disk drive with at least 5 MB of free space

•An available serial port

NOTE: With the descriptions which follow, it is

assumed that you have a basic understanding of how

to use your Windows-based operating system. If you

are not familiar with some of the Windows functions

described, refer to your Help Screens and manuals

included with your Windows software.

3.1.3 PCTRUNK SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

The PCTrunk software is supplied on two 3-1/2”

diskettes. Install this software as follows:

1. Make sure that there are no other Windows applica-

tions open during this installation procedure. Also,

make sure that the computer meets the minimum

requirements listed in the preceding section.

2. Insert PCTrunk Disk 1 in the disk drive of your

computer.

3. Windows 3.1 or NT - In the Program Manager,

double click the SETUP.EXE file on PCTrunk Disk

1 or click this file name and select File > Run.

TRANSCEIVER PROGRAMMING

3-2

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

Windows 95/98 - Select Start > Settings > Control

Panel and double click “Add/Remove Programs”.

Then click Install and Next. When SETUP.EXE is

automatically located on the floppy drive, click

Next, select the location for the start-up icon, and

enter the name you want to call the program.

4. Follow the instructions displayed by the setup

program. The default directory for the program is

\Program Files\PCTrunk. If you wish to use some

other directory, click Browse and select it or type the

name.

3.1.4 CONNECTING RPI TO COMPUTER AND

TRANSCEIVER

RPI Information

The RPI provides the required interface between

the computer and transceiver. It converts the RS-232

logic levels from the computer to the 5V logic levels

required by the transceiver microprocessor and vice

versa.

The current RPI available for programming trans-

ceivers of this type is Part No. 023-9800-000. Earlier

RPI’s, such as 023-9750-000 and 023-5810-000 can

also be used. However, the -9800- RPI is the only one

that has the speaker and microphone audio jacks

required to perform the alignment described in Section

6. In addition, it is the only RPI that can be used to

Flash program the transceiver to update the operating

software.

Cable Information

The cables from the RPI to the computer and

transceiver are not included with the RPI. The -9800-

RPI has a female DB9 connector for the computer

connection. Since most computer serial ports have a

male DB9 or DB25 connector, a male DB9 to female

DB9 or DB25 is usually required. This is a standard

cable available at most computer supply stores. A suit-

able cable is also listed in Table 1-1.

The cable from the RPI to the transceiver

connects from the RPI to the accessory connector of

the transceiver. A schematic diagram of this cable is

shown in Figure 3-2. The -122 version of this cable

can also be used because the extra wire connected to

pin 8 is not required with this radio.

Figure 3-2 RPI -Transceiver Cable Schematic

3.1.5 STARTING AND EXITING

To Start PCTrunk From Windows 3.1

In the Program Manager, open the PCTrunk

group window. Then double-click the PCTrunk icon.

To Start PCTrunk From Windows 95/98

Click the Start button and select the PCTrunk

group. Then double-click the PCTrunk icon.

To Exit PCTrunk:

SelectFile>ExitorpressALT+F4.

3.1.6 PROGRAMMING FILE TYPES

Programming data is stored in a disk file that can

be saved, read, copied, and deleted (see Section 3.3.1).

The file that is stored for each programming session

has the .DAT extension.

3.1.7 HELP FILES

To display help information on the current screen,

clickHelpinthemenubarorpressF1.

3.1.8 SCREEN TYPES

The following types of screens are displayed:

Radio-Wide - These screens program parameters that

are the same for all systems and channels. Separate

screens are displayed for General, Conventional,

SMARTNET/SmartZone, and Portable Options

parameters. Refer to Section 3.4 for more information

on these screens.

Modular

Connector

Orange

Black

Green

Yellow

Blue

White

Brown

Red

Pin A Pin B

PROGRAMMING CABLE

Part No. 597-2002-122/-123

RxD

Gnd

Mic Audio

Reset [1]

PTT

Vcc

Speaker

TxD

/Flash

[1] Pin 8 is connected on -123 cable only

RPI

To Radio

Accessory

Connector

TRANSCEIVER PROGRAMMING

3-3 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

System - These screens program the parameters that

are unique to the displayed Conventional,

SMARTNET, or SmartZone system. The system to be

edited is selected as described in Section 3.1.10.

Channel - This screen programs unique channel

parameters and assigns channels to each zone. The

specific parameters indicated in this screen are deter-

mined by the type of system selected in the “Type”

box (Conventional, SMARTNET, SmartZone).

The preceding screens are displayed in cascade

style or they can be minimized or resized as desired.

To cascade the active screens, select Window >

Cascade from the menu bar (see Section 3.3.6). To pop

a screen to the front, click the applicable button shown

in the following illustration or select it in the Window

menu. For example, if the Channel screen is displayed

and you want to quickly pop the Radio-Wide screen to

the front, click the Radio-Wide button. These buttons

canbedisplayedandhiddenbyclickingWindow>

Toolbar.

Screen Pop-Up Buttons and File Size

Indicator

3.1.9 FILE SIZE INDICATION

The maximum number of channels that can be

programmed may be limited by the available memory

space in the radio as described in Section 1.2.4. A

running indication of the amount of memory used by

the current data if it was downloaded to the radio is

displayed by a bar graph in the toolbar as shown

above. When the bar reaches the right end, the avail-

able memory is full and some channels may need to be

deleted if more information remains to be

programmed.

3.1.10 CREATING AND DISPLAYING

SYSTEMS

To create a new SMARTNET or SmartZone

system, select Systems > Add Systems and then the

desired system type from the menu bar (see Section

3.3.6). This menu is also used to delete a system. Only

one conventional system can be set up, and it is auto-

matically created when a programming file is opened

as described in Section 3.1.6. Therefore, there is no

option to add a conventional system.

Only one system can be displayed at a time.

Therefore, to edit information in one of the systems,

display that system by selecting Window in the menu

bar and then the system to be edited. Systems are iden-

tified by number and type. However, in the Channel

screen, channels or talk groups from any programmed

system can be set up. Therefore, it does not matter

which system is selected when programming channel

information.

3.2 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE

The following is a general procedure you can use

to program a transceiver.

3.2.1 PRELIMINARY

1. Select a programming file as follows:

Create a New File - To start with a new file

containing default parameters, select File > New

and then the frequency band of the radio (VHF/

UHF/800 MHz).

Open An Existing File - To open an existing file

stored on disk, select File > Open and then the file

to be opened.

Upload a File From a Radio - To transfer a file

from a radio to the computer to edit or use as a

basis to program another radio, connect the radio to

the computer as described in Section 3.1.4. Then

turn the radio on and select Upload from the menu

bar.

2. Before or after creating the programming file, be

sure the correct type (77xx portable) is selected by

the Radio Type menu (see Section 3.3.2).

3. A conventional system is automatically set up when

a new programming file is created. If SMARTNET

or SmartZone systems are also to be programmed,

set up at least one of that type as described in

Section 3.1.10.

TRANSCEIVER PROGRAMMING

3-4

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

3.2.2 PROGRAMMING RADIO WIDE

PARAMETERS

1. To display the Radio Wide screens, click the Radio

Wide button or select Window > Radio Wide

Parameters in the menu bar (see Section 3.1.8).

2. Program the applicable information in these screens

as described in Section 3.4.

3.2.3 PROGRAMMING CONVENTIONAL

CHANNELS

NOTE: If no conventional channels are programmed,

skip this section.

1. Make sure the conventional system is displayed by

selecting Window > Conventional in the menu bar.

2. If required, display the Conventional System

programming screens by clicking the System button

or selecting Window > Conventional System (see

Section 3.1.8).

3. Program the conventional systems and channels as

described in Section 3.5.

3.2.4 PROGRAMMING SMARTNET AND

SMARTZONE SYSTEMS

NOTE: If no SMARTNET or SmartZone systems are

programmed, skip this section.

1. Make sure the desired SMARTNET or SmartZone

system is displayed by selecting Window >

SMARTNET/SmartZone in the menu bar.

2. If required, display the programming screens for

that system by clicking the System button or

selecting Window > SMARTNET/SmartZone

System (see Section 3.1.8).

3. Program the SMARTNET/SmartZone system and

talk groups as described in Section 3.6.

4. To program additional SMARTNET/SmartZone

systems, add a new system as described in Section

3.1.10 and repeat Section 3.6.

3.2.5 PROGRAMMING RADIO

(DOWNLOADING FILE)

When all the required programming information

has been entered in the various programming screens,

the information can be programmed (downloaded) into

the radio. When downloading a file, be sure that all

connections between the computer and radio are

secure, the radio is turned on, and the proper serial

port is selected (see Section 3.3.1). Then proceed as

follows:

1. Select Download from the menu bar and then the

file type to be transferred (programming or

scrambling).

•If no file is currently loaded, a dialog box appears

to select the desired file.

•If a file is already loaded when Download is

selected, the current file is transferred to the radio.

2. Repeat for the other file type (if required).

NOTE: The information which follows (Sections 3.3-

3.6) provides detailed descriptions of the parameters

that are displayed in the various PCTrunk screens.

3.3 MENU COMMANDS

Menu Bar

3.3.1 FILE MENU

New - Creates a programming file with default param-

eters for the selected frequency range.

TRANSCEIVER PROGRAMMING

3-5 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

Open - Opens a programming file that was previously

saved to disk. If a modified file is currently open, you

are asked if that file should be saved before the new

file is opened.

Close - Closes the current file. If the file has been

modified and the changes have not been saved, you are

asked if the changes should be saved before closing.

Save - Saves the current file to disk using the current

file name.

Save As - Same as “Save” except you are prompted to

enter a new file name if desired.

Print - Prints the information in the current file.

Select Communications Port - Displays the Commu-

nications Port dialog box which is used to select the

serial port that is used to connect the transceiver to the

computer (see Section 3.1.4).

Exit - Closes the PCTrunk program. If the current file

has been modified and the changes have not been

saved, you are asked if the changes should be saved

before closing.

3.3.2 RADIO TYPE MENU

The Radio Type menu show above selects the

radio type (77xx Portable) being programmed.

3.3.3 DOWNLOAD MENU

Parameterto77xxPortable-Transfers the current

programming file to the radio connected to the

computer.

3.3.4 UPLOAD MENU

The Upload Menu is displayed only in the

opening screen before a programming file is created.

The following options are displayed:

Parameters from 77xx Portable - Transfers the

programming data from a radio to the PCTrunk

program. This data can then be viewed, edited, or

saved to a disk file as desired.

Version Information from 77xx Portable - Displays

the software version number and serial number of the

connected radio.

3.3.5 SYSTEMS MENU

The Systems Menu is used to create new

SMARTNET and SmartZone systems. It is also used

to delete current systems. Conventional systems

cannot be added because only one can be created.

Refer to Section 3.1.8 for more information.

3.3.6 WINDOW MENU

The Window Menu is used to select the system to

be edited. It can also be used to pop one of the screens

to the front. See Section 3.1.8 for more information.

TRANSCEIVER PROGRAMMING

3-6

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

3.3.7 HELP MENU

Contents - Displays the help system table of contents.

Search For Help On - Displays the search dialog box

that allows searching for a help topic by keyword.

About PCTrunk - Displays the software version

number of PCTrunk and the address of the E.F.

Johnson Company.

3.4 RADIO-WIDE PARAMETER SCREENS

3.4.1 INTRODUCTION

The radio-wide screens program the parameters

that are the same for all systems, channels, and zones.

Separate screens are used for General, Conventional,

SMARTNET/SmartZone, and Portable Options

parameters. Refer to the information which follows.

3.4.2 RADIO-WIDE GENERAL SCREEN

Band

Displays the operating band selected by the Radio

Type Menu (see Section 3.3.2). The selected oper-

ating band must match that of the radio being

programmed. Currently, only 800 MHz 77xx models

are available.

Zones

Total Zones - The total number of zones currently set

up. The maximum number allowed is 16. Zones are

added by clicking the Add button (see following).

Current Zone - Indicates the currently selected zone.

To select another zone, click the up/down arrows.

Zone Alias - Edits the unique alpha identification for

the displayed zone.Up to 8 characters can be entered.

The zone alias is briefly displayed whenever a new

zone is selected. Refer to Section 1.2.4 for more

information on zones.

Add (Zones) Button - Adds another zone.

Delete (Zones) Button - Deletes the last zone added.

Defaults

Home Zone - Selects the zone that is selected by the

Home Zone option switch if programmed.

Backlight On Time - Selects the length of time that

the backlight stays on after any key or the Backlight

option switch is pressed (see “Options” which fol-

lows and Section 2.3.3).

Options

Backlight Key Press - If checked, the backlight turns

on for the “Backlight On Time” above whenever any

front panel key is pressed (see Section 2.3.3).

Battery Saver - If checked, low transmit power is

automatically selected when the RSSI level indicates

that the site is nearby (see Section 2.3.6).

Keypad Lockout - If checked, all front panel keys are

disabled and are not available to the user (see Section

2.3.5).

Power-Up On Home Zone - If checked, the home

zone is always selected at power-up.

Beeps - If checked, all tones are enabled. Otherwise,

no tones sound (see Section 2.3.10).

TRANSCEIVER PROGRAMMING

3-7 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

Radio Wide Scan List

NOTE: The radio-wide scan list cannot be pro-

grammed until all channels to be included have been

set up as described in the Conventional and SMART-

NET/SmartZone sections (3.5 and 3.6, respectively).

Clicking the Radio Wide Scan List button in the

General screen displays the following screen which

programs the radio-wide scan list described in Section

2.3.11. The buttons and other parameters in this screen

are as follows:

Radio-Wide Scan List Screen

Button - Displays the following

screen that selects the channels in each Zone and

System that are in this scan list. Select each Zone

and then the channels to be included from that zone.

Delete Entry - Deletes the selected channel from the

scan list.

Scan Hold Time - This programs the delay that

occurs before radio-wide scanning resumes after a

message is no longer being received. Times of 0 -

7.5 seconds can be programmed (see Section

2.3.11).

Modify List Screen

Assign Function Buttons

Clicking the “Assign Functions Buttons” Button

in the General screen displays the following screen

which programs the option switches. Two are located

on the side panel and three or five on the front panel as

described in Section 2.3.4. These option switches can

be programmed with a different set of functions for

each operating mode (conventional and SMARTNET/

SmartZone).

Assign Function Buttons Screen

Program the option switches as follows:

1. In the System Type pull-down menu, select the

mode to be programmed (either conventional or

SMARTNET/SmartZone).

TRANSCEIVER PROGRAMMING

3-8

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

2. To program a switch, click the arrow to display the

pull-down menu and then select the desired function

from that menu. NOTE: Side Button 1 is the top

(AUX) button and Side Button 2 is the bottom (FCN)

button. Also, the * and # keys are not available with

limited keypad (3-key) models.

3. Repeat for all switches and modes to be

programmed and then exit this screen by clicking

the Close button.

3.4.3 RADIO-WIDE CONVENTIONAL SCREEN

The radio-wide conventional screen is shown

above, and it is used to program the DTMF ANI ID.

This ID is used on channels programmed for pre- or

post-transmit ANI (see Section 3.5.4) and consists of

eight digits from 0-9.

3.4.4 RADIO-WIDE SMARTNET/SMARTZONE

SCREEN

The radio-wide SMARTNET/SmartZone screen

is shown above, and is used to program the following

parameters:

Full Spectrum CC Scan

In a SmartZone system, if all potential control

channel frequencies have been searched, the radio

enters a channel-by-channel search across the full

spectrum that the radio covers. The timer sets the time

it performs this scan before it checks the expected

frequencies again. After it checks these frequencies, it

returns to full spectrum scanning. This cycle repeats

until a control channel is found.

On-Off - Enables or disables full spectrum scan.

Timer - Sets the time that full spectrum scanning

occurs as just described.

Hot DTMF

Enable/Disable - When enabled, allows the user to

send DTMF tones while transmitting. When dis-

abled, pressing numeric keys (0-9, , #) while

transmitting has no affect.

Voice On Control

With SmartZone operation, some remote sites are

designated Voice On Control sites. In these sites, if all

available traffic channels are occupied, control chan-

nels become traffic channels when additional traffic

channels are requested. The Voice On Control parame-

ters determine how the radio reacts to various situa-

tions that may occur. For example, when a conversa-

tion is complete, the radio may look for a control

channel that has become a traffic channel.

Enable/Disable - Determines if the voice on control

parameters are active.

Site Lock Time - This is the amount of time a radio

remains on the Voice On Control site before looking

for another site.

Activation Time - This is the amount of time the

radio waits when the control channel comes back

from Voice On Control before it transmits any pend-

ing ISWs. This prevents all radios on a Voice On

Control site from submitting ISWs at the same time.

Pending Emergency Time - This is the amount of

time the radio waits to submit an Emergency ISW

TRANSCEIVER PROGRAMMING

3-9 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

after the control channel returns from the Voice On

Control mode.

Adjustable Parameters

Busy Override Delay - With SmartZone operation,

this is the amount of time a user must press the PTT

switch to override a SmartZone busy that occurs

because some member of the talk group is present at

a site where there are no traffic channels available.

Affiliate Hold Off - With SmartZone operation, this

is the delay time that occurs after acquiring the con-

trol channel before it sends an affiliation ISW. This

prevents all radios on the system from sending affil-

iation ISWs at the same time.

Failsoft Inactivity - Programs failsoft operation (see

Section 2.5.11). If the radio remains inactive (no

receive or transmit activity on channel) while operat-

ing in the failsoft mode for the programmed time, the

radio momentarily leaves the failsoft mode and

attempts to find a control channel. If “0” is pro-

grammed, the radio does not leave the failsoft mode.

3.4.5 RADIO-WIDE PORTABLE OPTIONS

SCREEN

The radio-wide Mobile Options screen is shown

above, and is used to program the following

parameters (see Section 2.3.6):

Standby Chirp - Selects if a beep sounds every

minute while a low battery condition is being

detected.

Tx Chirp - Selects if a beep sounds every time the

PTT switch is pressed while a low battery condition

is being detected.

LED Indicator - Selects if the top panel BAT LED

indicates a low battery condition.

3.5 PROGRAMMING CONVENTIONAL

SYSTEMS AND CHANNELS

3.5.1 INTRODUCTION

The following information describes how

conventional channels are programmed. Conventional

systems do not need to be set up because only one can

be programmed, and it is automatically set up when

the programming file is selected as described in

Section 3.1.6. Up to 256 conventional channels can be

programmed (if no SMARTNET/SmartZone systems

are programmed). Refer to Section 1.2.4 for more

information on systems and channels.

The following is the recommended procedure for

programming conventional channels:

1. Program the radio-wide information as described in

Section 3.4.

2. If other types of systems are programmed, make

sure the conventional system is selected by selecting

Window > Conventional in the menu bar.

3. Program the conventional system information and

then the channel information as follows.

3.5.2 CONVENTIONAL SYSTEM GENERAL

SCREEN

The conventional system General screen is shown

above, and it programs the following parameters:

TRANSCEIVER PROGRAMMING

3-10

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

Timers

Tx Time-Out Timer - This timer limits the length of

transmissions (Section 2.3.9). Times up to 3 minutes,

45 seconds in 15-second steps can be programmed.

Penalty Timer - This timer disables transmitting after

the time-out timer expires (Section 2.4.7). Times up

to 3 minutes, 45 seconds in 15-second steps can be

programmed.

Conversation Timer - This timer limits the total

length of a conversation (Section 2.4.8). Times up to

7.5 minutes in 0.5-minute steps can be programmed.

Keypad Selectable CTCSS/DCS - Selects if CTCSS/

DCS (Call Guard) squelch codes can be reassigned

using the keypad (see Section 2.4.6).

Busy Channel Override - Selects if the busy channel

lockout feature can be overridden by quickly releasing

and then pressing the PTT switch (see Section 2.4.5).

Conventional System Scan List Screen

Scan List Button

Clicking the Scan List button displays the

preceding screen which is used to program the conven-

tional scan lists described in Section 2.4.11. Only Scan

List 1 is available with limited keypad (3-key) models.

NOTE: The conventional scan lists cannot be

programmed until all the conventional channels are

programmed. Therefore, first program the channels as

described in Sections 3.5.3 and 3.5.4.

To modify a list, click and the

screen which follows is displayed. Select the desired

scan list in the box on the top and then select the zone

and the channels from that zone to be included. Repeat

for each zone. Do this for each list programmed. The

button deletes the selected channel(s)

from the scan list.

Conventional System Modify Scan List Screen

The following parameters are programmed in the

Conventional System Scan List Screen on the left.

Keypad Editing

This function selects if the user is allowed to edit

the scan list. This requires the Scan Edit option switch

as described in Section 2.4.11. User editing can be

enabled and disabled on each scan list.

Scan Mode

Sets the channel on which transmissions occur

when the PTT switch is pressed while scanning. A

different mode can be programmed for each scan list.

In addition, it selects if priority sampling is used and

TRANSCEIVER PROGRAMMING

3-11 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

also the type of priority channel (see the “Priority

Channel” description which follows). The following

modes are available:

No Priority - Priority sampling does not occur (all

channels are scanned in sequence). The radio trans-

mits on the selected channel.

Priority/Tx Priority - Priority sampling occurs

and the priority channel is the one programmed in

the selected scan list. The radio transmits on the

priority channel.

Priority/Tx Selected - Priority sampling occurs

and the priority channel is the one programmed in

the selected scan list. The radio transmits on the

selected channel.

Priority on Sel Chan - The priority channel is

always the selected channel (even if the scan list is

programmed with a priority channel). The radio

transmits on the selected channel.

Talkback Scan - No priority sampling occurs

(even if the scan list is programmed with a priority

channel). The radio transmits on the channel of a

call while scanning is halted. Then when scanning

resumes, it transmits on the selected channel.

Scan Timers

Scan Hold Time - Sets the delay that occurs before

scanning resumes after a signal is no longer

received (see Section 2.3.11).

Lookback Time A - This time determines how

often the priority channel is checked for activity.

Times of 0.25-4.00 seconds in 0.25-second steps

can be programmed.

Lookback Time B - This time determines how

often the priority channel is checked once an incor-

rect Call Guard (CTCSS/DCS) code is detected.

Since it takes much longer to detect an incorrect

Call Guard signal than a carrier, this time should be

relatively long to prevent the interruptions from

making a message difficult to understand. Times of

0.5-8.0secondscanbeprogrammedin0.5-second

steps.

Priority Channel Selection

The Scan Mode parameter in the preceding

Conventional System Scan List screen selects if

priority channel sampling is enabled on the selected

scan list. It also selects the type of priority channel

(either fixed or the selected) if applicable.

If the “Priority/Tx Priority” or “Priority/Selected”

mode is programmed, fixed priority channel sampling

is selected. The fixed priority channel must then be

chosen for the scan list. To do this, click the

button in the preceding Modify Scan List

screen and then select the desired zone/channel. Refer

to Section 2.4.12 for more information on priority

channel sampling.

3.5.3 SETTING UP CONVENTIONAL

CHANNELS

The conventional Channel screen shown in

Figure 3-3 which follows is displayed when a conven-

tional channel is selected. This screen programs

unique channel parameters and also assigns channels

to the selectable zones displayed by the transceiver.

The general procedure for setting up a conven-

tional channel is as follows. Refer to the descriptions

which follow this procedure for information on the

parameters in the channel screens.

1. Make sure that the desired zone is selected in the

Zone box.

2. Select the channel number in the Channels Index

box which is to be programmed with the channel. If

the channel number display mode is selected (see

Section 2.4.2), this will be the number displayed

when the channel is selected.

3. To assign a conventional channel, select “Conven-

tional” as the channel type.

4. Click the Modify button to display the screen which

enables that channel and programs the alias (tag)

and transmit and receive frequencies. Then program

the other parameters in the main part of the screen.

Refer to the next section for more information.

TRANSCEIVER PROGRAMMING

3-12

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

Figure 3-3 Conventional Channel Screen

3.5.4 CONVENTIONAL CHANNEL SCREEN

PARAMETERS

The following parameters are programmed in the

conventional channel screen shown in Figure 3-3.

Selected Channel

Zone Box - Clicking the arrow to the right of this box

displays the available zones. Click on a zone to select

it. Zones and zone aliases are set up on the Radio-

Wide General screen described in Section 3.4.2.

Channel Index Box - Displays the available channels

in the selected zone. The channel type is selected by

the Channel Type box below it.

Modify Button - Displays the screen that

follows which enables the channel (makes it select-

able) and programs the alias (tag) and transmit and

receive frequencies.

The parameters in this screen are as follows:

Channel - Selects the channel to be edited.

Alias - Programs the identification that is displayed

when the channel is selected. Up to 8

characters can be programmed.

Transmit - Programs the transmit frequency of the

channel.

Receive - Programs the receive frequency of the

channel.

Enable This Channel - The box must be checked for

the channel to be selectable.

Rx Only - The box is checked if the channel is

receive-only (transmitter disabled).

Copy Parameters From Channel - If another channel

is selected, the parameters from that chan-

nel are copied to the new channel.

TRANSCEIVER PROGRAMMING

3-13 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

NOTE: Channel numbers not assigned must be

programmed for conventional operation and then not

enabled in the above screen because SMARTNET/

SmartZone channels cannot be disabled.

Channel Type

Channel Type Box - Selects the specific system from

which the channel is selected. All programmed sys-

tems are displayed by number and type (conven-

tional, SMARTNET, SmartZone). When a different

channel type is selected, the screen for that type of

channel is automatically displayed.

System Specific Information - With conventional

systems, indicates the frequency of the selected

channel without having to select the Modify box.

Transmit Power

Fixes the transmit power on the channel for the

high or low level or allows it to be switch selectable

(the Hi/Lo Power option switch is then required).

Refer to Section 2.4.10 for more information.

Tx Time-Out

Enables or disables the time-out timer on the

channel. The time-out timer time is programmed in the

conventional system General screen (Section 3.5.2).

Busy Channel Lockout

Off = disabled, Noise = transmit disallowed if

carrier is detected, Tone = transmit allowed with

carrier detected only if correct Call Guard (CTCSS/

DCS)codeisdetected.

Coded Squelch

This sets the transmit and receive Call Guard

(CTCSS/DCS) coding, if any, used on the channel. If

“None” is selected, no code is transmitted and carrier-

controlled squelch is used when receiving (Section

2.4.6). The standard Call Guard tones and codes are

listed in Table 3-1 on page 3-22.

Signaling

Off - No ANI signaling is used.

Leading ANI - A DTMF-coded ID is sent at the

beginning of each transmission. This ID is set in the

radio-wide conventional screen (Section 3.4.3).

Trailing ANI - A DTMF-coded ID is sent at the end

of each transmission.

DTMF Enabled - With full keypad (15-key) models,

allows manual dialing of numbers using the DTMF

keypad.

Channel Modulation

This selects if the channel modulation is wide-

band (5 kHz) or narrowband (2.5 kHz).

3.6 PROGRAMMING SMARTNET/SMARTZONE

SYSTEMS AND CHANNELS

3.6.1 INTRODUCTION

To program SMARTNET and SmartZone

systems and channels, proceed as follows:

1. Program the SMARTNET/SmartZone radio-wide

information as described in Section 3.4.

2. To create a new SMARTNET/SmartZone system,

select the Systems > Add Systems in the menu bar

(see Section 3.1.10). Up to sixteen systems of any

type can be programmed as described in Section

1.2.4.

3. Program the SMARTNET/SmartZone system infor-

mation as described starting in the next section.

Make sure the desired SMARTNET or SmartZone

system is displayed by selecting it in the Window

menu in the menu bar. Then program the channels as

described starting in Section 3.6.8.

TRANSCEIVER PROGRAMMING

3-14

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

3.6.2 SMARTNET/SMARTZONE SYSTEM

GENERAL SCREEN

The SMARTNET/SmartZone System General

screen is shown above, and it programs the following

parameters:

Restricted Access

Change System ID Button - Displays the Change

System ID screen which is used to enter the system

ID of the system. This ID is entered as a hexadecimal

number from 0-9 and A-F. Valid numbers are from

0001-FFFF. The system ID corresponding to the

desired ID must also be located in the “key” subdi-

rectory of the program file.

System ID - Read-only field which shows the ID of

the system currently being edited.

Splinter Channels

When splinter channels are enabled, the receive

and transmit frequencies are 12.5 kHz lower than the

normal frequencies. Splinter channels are used only as

required in the Mexico and Canada border areas for

frequencies between 806 and 820.975 MHz.

Channel Modulation

When “Wideband” is enabled, the radio operates

with a 4 kHz maximum deviation between 821.000

and 824.975 MHz and 5 kHz maximum deviation for

all other frequencies. When it is disabled, deviation is

5 kHz with all frequencies.

PTT ID

Enables or disables the PTT ID.

System Lists Button

This button displays the screens used to program

the various lists that are unique for each SMARTNET/

SmartZone system. Refer to Section 3.6.7 for more

information on these lists.

Dynamic Regrouping

Enable For This System - When this box is checked,

a dynamic regrouping channel is enabled. This is a

SMARTNET channel which has the corresponding

talk group dynamically set by the dispatcher.

Zone - The physical zone containing the dynamic

regrouping channel. The value is selected on the

Channel Parameters screen.

Channel - The physical channel used for dynamic

regrouping. The value is selected on the Channel

Parameters screen.

Affiliation Type

Automatic - The radio immediately affiliates with the

central controller as soon as it is turned on and auto-

matically re-affiliates each time the talk group is

changed.

On PTT - The radio affiliates with the central control-

ler only when the PTT switch is pressed.

Time-Out Timer

Programs the time-out timer setting for the

system. It can be programmed for 0 min, 15 sec up to

3 min, 45 sec or it can be disabled (see Section 2.3.9).

ISW Delay Time

Increasing or decreasing this value changes the

transmission timing of ISWs relative to the reception

of OSWs.

TRANSCEIVER PROGRAMMING

3-15 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

3.6.3 SMARTNET/SMARTZONE SYSTEM

OTHER ID’S SCREEN

The SMARTNET/SmartZone Other ID’s screen

is shown above, and it programs the following

parameters.

Individual ID - Uniquely identifies the radio on a par-

ticular system. Each radio must have a different Unit

ID. Valid Unit IDs are from 1-49152.

Connect Tone - The tone expected by the controller

on the traffic channel to verify that a subscriber trans-

mission is occurring. This tone should be set the

same as it is in the controller.

3.6.4 SMARTNET/SMARTZONE SYSTEM

PHONE INTERCONNECT SCREEN

The SMARTNET/SmartZone Phone Intercon-

nect screen is shown above, and the parameters it

programs are as follows:

Phone Interconnect

Refer to Section 2.5.6 for more information on

telephone calls.

Disabled - Telephone calls cannot be placed or

received.

Answer Only - Telephone calls can be received but

not placed.

List Only - Telephone calls can be placed and

received, and numbers can be recalled from memory

only.

Unlimited - Telephone calls can be placed and

received, and numbers can be recalled from memory

or dialed using the front panel keypad (full keypad

15-key models only).

Private Call

Same as above, but for private (unit-to-unit) calls.

Refer to Sections 2.5.4 and 2.5.5 for more information.

Private Call II

Programs either standard (Private Conversation

II™) or enhanced (Enhanced Private Conversation™)

private calls as follows:

Standard - The user does not receive any feedback

when the called radio is not active in the system.

Only a “No Answer” is received if the called radio

does not answer.

Enhanced - When a call is placed, the system tells the

user if the called radio is currently active in the sys-

tem and within range. Thecalling radio displays “NO

ACK” if the called radio is not active in the system

and “NO ANSWR” if it is active but does not answer.

Phone DTMF Timing

Initial Delay - Delay from 50-500 milliseconds from

when a traffic channel is granted for phone intercon-

nect to the start of the dialing out of the phone

number.

Digit Duration - Duration from 50-500 milliseconds

of each phone number digit.

Inter-Digit Delay - Delay from 50-500 milliseconds

between each digit of a phone number.

TRANSCEIVER PROGRAMMING

3-16

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

3.6.5 SMARTNET/SMARTZONE SYSTEM

TALK GROUPS SCREEN

The SMARTNET/SmartZone Talk Groups screen

is used to set up SMARTNET/SmartZone talk groups

and program unique talk group information. This

screen is shown above, and the parameters it programs

are as follows:

Talk Group - Selects the talk group to program. This

is the actual ID of the talk group. Talk groups are

added or deleted by clicking the Add TG or Delete

TG button (see following). Talk groups are assigned

to channels on the channel screen (see Section 3.6.9).

- Clicking this button displays a dialog

box that adds a new talk group. The alias (alphatag)

of up to 8 characters is entered, and the new group is

then added after the others that are already set up.

Each SMARTNET/SmartZone system can be pro-

grammed with up to 256 talk groups.

- Clicking this button deletes the cur-

rently selected talk group (the one displayed in the

“Talk Group” box).

Failsoft Channel

Enable - Enables a failsoft channel on the talk group

if a controller failure occurs (see Section 2.5.11).

Disable - The failsoft mode is not entered if the

controller fails.

Tx/Rx Frequency - Programs the failsoft channel

frequency if “Enabled” is checked.

3.6.6 SMARTNET/SMARTZONE SYSTEM

EMERGENCY SETTINGS SCREEN

The SMARTNET/SmartZone Emergency

Settings screen and the parameters it programs are as

follows:

Emergency Call

Enable - When the Emergency option switch and

then the PTT switch are pressed, an emergency group

call is transmitted.

Disable - An emergency group call is not authorized.

Emergency Alarm

Disabled -No emergency signal is sent when the user

presses the Emergency option switch.

Normal - When the user presses the Emergency

option switch, an emergency signal is sent to the dis-

patcher. Audio and visual feedback is provided by

the radio.

Silent - Same as “Normal” except no audio or visual

feedback is provided.

Retry Counter - When “Unlimited” is selected, an

emergency call is repeated until acknowledged or

canceled. When “Limited” is checked, calls are

attempted only the specified number of times.

TRANSCEIVER PROGRAMMING

3-17 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

3.6.7 SMARTNET/SMARTZONE SYSTEM

LISTS SCREENS

Clicking the button in the General

screen described in Section 3.6.2 displays the screens

used to program the various lists that are unique for

each SMARTNET/SmartZone system. These screens

are as follows:

Trunking Phone List Screen

This screen programs the phone number list if

used (see Section 2.5.6). To edit this list, click the

Trunking Phone List tab and then the “Modify List”

button on the right side of the screen. The following

information is then programmed in the dialog box that

is displayed:

Entry Number - This box selects the entry to be

edited. The scroll bars to the right of this box select

the desired entry. A phone list can contain up to 16

entries. Selecting a new entry number automatically

validates and stores the current entry. If the current

entry contains an invalid field (for example, too

many digits in the phone number), the entry number

does not change and the invalid field is highlighted.

Entry Alias - Up to 8 characters can be entered to

identify the phone number. This identification is dis-

played when phone numbers are selected by the user

from the list. Only uppercase letters can be entered,

so lowercase letters are automatically converted to

uppercase by the program.

Phone Number - This is the number dialed when the

location is selected. Characters that can be entered

include 0-9, #, (,), and P (a “P” programs a pause).

The maximum number of digits excluding (,) and

spaces is 16, and the maximum including (,) and

spacesis24.

Close - Clicking this button verifies the current entry,

stores it, and then closes the dialog box. If the current

entry contains an invalid field, the dialog box does

not close and the invalid field is highlighted.

Help - Accesses the Help screen. Help can also be

selected at any time by pressing the F1 key.

Message Aliasing Screen

This screen associates an alias (name) with each

message number (see Section 2.5.8). To edit this list,

click the Message Aliasing tab and then the “Modify

List” button on the right side. The following informa-

tion is then programmed in the dialog box that is

displayed:

Message Number - This box selects the message to

be edited. The scroll bars to the right of this box

select the desired message number.

Message Alias - Programs the alias which can be up

to any 8 alphanumeric characters.

Close Button - Validates the entry and closes the dia-

log box. The entry is also validated when another

message number is selected.

TRANSCEIVER PROGRAMMING

3-18

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

Announcement Groups Screen

This screen programs the announcement groups

that are used to communicate with several talk groups

simultaneously. There can be up to 3 announcement

groups per system, and each announcement group can

have up to 15 talk groups.

To create an announcement group, click the “Add

AG” button and the “Add TGs to the AG” screen

shown above is displayed. Enter the announcement

group ID, click the talk groups to select/de-select those

that are to be included, and then create the announce-

ment group by clicking the “Create AG” button. To

delete the current announcement group, click the

“Delete AG” button.

To edit an announcement group, click the

“Modify List” button on the right and the preceding

screen is displayed. Select the announcement group to

be edited from a pull-down menu selecting by clicking

the “AG” arrow. Then click the talk groups to select/

de-select them and then click the “Update List” button

to make the changes.

Control Channels Screen

This screen allows the system manager to view

and edit the control channels. Each SMARTNET

system can have up to four control channels, and each

SmartZone system can have up to 32 control channels.

Only one control channel is active at a time.

To edit this list, click the Control Channels tab

and then the “Modify List” button on the right side.

The following information is then programmed in the

dialog box that is displayed:

Control Channel - Selects the control channel to be

edited. To add a new channel, click the “New Entry”

button.

Frequency - The transmit and receive frequency of

the control channel. These are the mobile frequen-

cies, not the repeater frequencies. Only multiples of

5kHzand6.25kHzarevalid.With800MHzfre-

quencies, a receive frequency 45 MHz above the

transmit frequency is automatically entered.

New Entry Button - Click this button to display the

dialog box used to add another control channel.

TRANSCEIVER PROGRAMMING

3-19 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

Trunking Call List Screen

This screen is shown above, and it allows the list

of IDs used for private calls to be programmed. A

maximum of 16 IDs can be programmed (see Sections

2.5.4 and 2.5.5).

To edit this list, click the Trunking Call List tab

and then the “Modify List” button on the right side.

This following information is then programmed in the

dialog box that is displayed:

Entry Number - This box selects the entry to be

edited. The scroll bars to the right of this box select

the desired entry. A private call list can contain up to

16 entries. Selecting a new entry number automati-

cally validates and stores the current entry. If the cur-

rent entry contains an invalid field, the entry number

does not change and the invalid field is highlighted.

Entry Alias - Up to 8 characters can be entered to

identify the user being called. This identification is

displayed when the mobile to be called is selected by

the user from the list. Only uppercase letters can be

entered, so lowercase letters are automatically con-

verted to uppercase by the program.

Call ID - This is the ID of the radio being called.

Valid entries are 1-65535. A “0” is detected as no

entry.

Close Button - Verifies the current entry, stores it,

and then closes the dialog box. If the current entry

contains an invalid field, the dialog box does not

close and the invalid field is highlighted.

Priority Monitor Scan Screen

This screen programs up to three Priority Monitor

scan lists that are allowed. Each scan list can contain

up to 15 channels plus a priority channel (see Section

2.5.12). These channels must be from the same

SMARTNET/SmartZone system. Channels set up for

other systems are not allowed.

To edit a list, click the Priority Monitor Scan tab

and then click the “Modify List” button on the right

side. A screen similar to the bottom screen shown

above is then displayed to select the channels to be

included in that scan list. Select channels as follows:

1. Selectthescanlisttobeeditedbyclickingthescroll

bars next to the “Scan List To Modify” box.

2. Select the first zone with channels to be included

and select the desired channels. Repeat for the other

zones.

3. To select the priority channel, click the Set Priority

button. Then select the desired Zone/Channel or

“None” if no priority channel is to be scanned.

TRANSCEIVER PROGRAMMING

3-20

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

4. Repeat the preceding steps for the other scan lists if

applicable.

Status Aliasing Screen

This screen is shown above, and it programs the

alias for each of up to eight status conditions that can

be sent. The meaning of each status number is defined

by the system manager. Refer to Section 2.5.9 for

more information.

To edit this list, click the Status Aliasing tab and

then the “Modify List” button on the right side. The

following information is then programmed in the

dialog box that is displayed:

Status Number -Thescrollbarstotherightofthis

box select the status number that is to be edited.

Status Alias - Programs up to 8 characters that iden-

tify the status. This identification is displayed when

the user selects a status condition.

3.6.8 SETTING UP SMARTNET/SMART-

ZONE CHANNELS

The SMARTNET/SmartZone Channel screen

shown in Figure 3-4 is displayed when the

SMARTNET or SmartZone channel type is selected.

This screen programs unique channel parameters and

also assigns channels to the selectable zones displayed

by the transceiver.

The general procedure for setting up a

SMARTNET/SmartZone channel is as follows. Refer

to the descriptions which follow this procedure for

information on SMARTNET/SmartZone Channel

screen parameters.

1. Make sure that the desired zone is selected in the

Zone box.

2. Select the channel number in the Channels Index

box which is to be programmed with the channel.

3. To set up a SMARTNET channel, select

“SMARTNET” as the channel type, and to set up a

SmartZone channel, select “SmartZone”.

4. Click the Modify button to display the dialog box

shown in the lower part of Figure 3-4. This box

programs the alias (tag) that is displayed when it is

selected.

5. Program the other parameters in the main part of the

screen (see information which follows).

3.6.9 SMARTNET/SMARTZONE CHANNEL

SCREEN PARAMETERS

The following parameters are programmed in the

SMARTNET/SmartZone channel screen shown in

Figure 3-4.

Selected Channel

Zone Box - Clicking the arrow to the right of this box

displays the available zones. Click on a zone to select

it. Zones and zone aliases are set up on the Radio-

Wide General screen described in Section 3.4.2.

Channel Index Box - Displays the channels in the

selected zone. The channel type is selected by the

Channel Type box below it.

- Displays the screen shown in the lower

part of Figure 3-4. The parameters programmed in

this screen are as follows:

Channel - Selects the channel to be edited.

Alias - Programs the identification that is displayed

when the channel is selected. Up to 8

characters can be programmed.

Transmit - Not programmable because the transmit

frequency is dynamically assigned over the

air (“Trunked” is always displayed).

Receive - Dynamically assigned like the transmit

frequency.

TRANSCEIVER PROGRAMMING

3-21 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

Figure 3-4 SMARTNET/SmartZone Channel Screen

Enable This Channel - Not used because SMART-

NET/SmartZone channels are always

enabled if set up. To disable a channel so

that it is not selectable, choose the conven-

tional type and do not check this box.

Copy Parameters From Channel - If another channel

is selected in the box, the parameters from

that channel are copied to the new channel.

Channel Type

Channel Type Box - Selects the specific system from

which the channel is selected. All programmed

systems are displayed by number and type (conven-

tional, SMARTNET, SmartZone). When a different

channel type is selected, the screen for that type of

channel is automatically displayed.

Other Screen Parameters

System Specific Information - With SMARTNET/

SmartZone systems, indicates the system ID

programmed on the system General screen (see

Section 3.6.2).

Talk Group - Selects the talk group selected by that

channel. Talk groups are programmed in the Talk

Group screen described in Section 3.6.5.

Announcement Group - Selects one of up to three

announcement groups selected by the channel. Refer

to “Announcement Group Screen” in Section 3.6.7

for more information.

Emergency Group - Selects the talk group used for

emergency calls.

TRANSCEIVER PROGRAMMING

3-22

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

Talk Permit Tone - When enabled, a short tone

sounds after a request for a group call has been

approved by the main controller. This indicates that

speaking can begin. When disabled, no audio feed-

back is used to indicate when speaking can begin.

System Scan - Selects the Priority Monitor Scan list

selected by the channel (see “Priority Monitor Scan

Screen” description in Section 3.6.7). If “No Scan

List” is programmed, scanning is not selectable on

that channel.

Auto Scan - When enabled and a channel is selected,

the radio automatically begins scanning the scan list

associated with that channel. When disabled, scan-

ning can only be started manually by the Scan option

switch.

Table 3-1 Call Guard (CTCSS/DCS) Codes and Tones

Recommended Tone Call Guard Codes

Code Freq Code Freq Code Freq Code Freq Code Freq

01 67.0 10 94.8 19 127.3 28 173.8 38* 250.3

02 71.9 11** 97.4 20 131.8 29 179.9 39** 69.3

03 74.4 12 100.0 21 136.5 30 186.2 40** 206.5

04 77.0 13 103.5 22 141.3 31 192.8 41** 229.1

05 79.7 14 107.2 23 146.2 32 203.5 42** 254.1

06 82.5 15 110.9 24 151.4 33 210.7

07 85.4 16 114.8 25 156.7 34* 218.1

08 88.5 17 118.8 26 162.2 35* 225.7

09 91.5 18 123.0 27 167.9 37* 241.8

* These tones normally are not used because of their close proximity to the voice frequencies

** This tone is normally not used because it may cause interference with adjacent tones.

Recommended Digital Call Guard Codes

023 065 131 172 261 346 431 532 654 743

025 071 132 174 263 351 432 546 662 754

026 072 134 205 265 364 445 565 664

031 073 143 223 271 365 464 606 703

032 074 152 226 306 371 465 612 712

043 114 155 243 311 411 466 624 723

047 115 156 244 315 412 503 627 731

051 116 162 245 331 413 506 631 732

054 125 165 251 343 423 516 632 734

1 851.0125 806.0125

2 851.0375 806.0375

3 851.0625 806.0625

4 851.0875 806.0875

5 851.1125 806.1125

6 851.1375 806.1375

7 851.1625 806.1625

8 851.1875 806.1875

9 851.2125 806.2125

10 851.2375 806.2375

11 851.2625 806.2625

12 851.2875 806.2875

13 851.3125 806.3125

14 851.3375 806.3375

15 851.3625 806.3625

16 851.3875 806.3875

17 851.4125 806.4125

18 851.4375 806.4375

19 851.4625 806.4625

20 851.4875 806.4875

21 851.5125 806.5125

22 851.5375 806.5375

23 851.5625 806.5625

24 851.5875 806.5875

FCCChan.

No. Mobile Rx

Freq. Mobile Tx

Freq FCCChan.

No. Mobile Rx

Freq. Mobile Tx

Freq FCCChan.

No. Mobile Rx

Freq Mobile Tx

Freq

800 MHz Channels

TRANSCEIVER PROGRAMMING

3-23 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

25 851.6125 806.6125

26 851.6375 806.6375

27 851.6625 806.6625

28 851.6875 806.6875

29 851.7125 806.7125

30 851.7375 806.7375

31 851.7625 806.7625

32 851.7875 806.7875

33 851.8125 806.8125

34 851.8375 806.8375

35 851.8625 806.8625

36 851.8875 806.8875

37 851.9125 806.9125

38 851.9375 806.9375

39 851.9625 806.9625

40 851.9875 806.9875

41 852.0125 807.0125

42 852.0375 807.0375

43 852.0625 807.0625

44 852.0875 807.0875

45 852.1125 807.1125

46 852.1375 807.1375

47 852.1625 807.1625

48 852.1875 807.1875

49 852.2125 807.2125

50 852.2375 807.2375

51 852.2625 807.2625

52 852.2875 807.2875

53 852.3125 807.3125

54 852.3375 807.3375

55 852.3625 807.3625

56 852.3875 807.3875

57 852.4125 807.4125

58 852.4375 807.4375

59 852.4625 807.4625

60 852.4875 807.4875

61 852.5125 807.5125

62 852.5375 807.5375

63 852.5625 807.5625

64 852.5875 807.5875

65 852.6125 807.6125

66 852.6375 807.6375

67 852.6625 807.6625

68 852.6875 807.6875

69 852.7125 807.7125

70 852.7375 807.7375

71 852.7625 807.7625

72 852.7875 807.7875

73 852.8125 807.8125

74 852.8375 807.8375

75 852.8625 807.8625

76 852.8875 807.8875

77 852.9125 807.9125

78 852.9375 807.9375

79 852.9625 807.9625

80 852.9875 807.9875

81 853.0125 808.0125

82 853.0375 808.0375

83 853.0625 808.0625

84 853.0875 808.0875

85 853.1125 808.1125

86 853.1375 808.1375

87 853.1625 808.1625

88 853.1875 808.1875

89 853.2125 808.2125

90 853.2375 808.2375

91 853.2625 808.2625

92 853.2875 808.2875

93 853.3125 808.3125

94 853.3375 808.3375

95 853.3625 808.3625

96 853.3875 808.3875

97 853.4125 808.4125

98 853.4375 808.4375

99 853.4625 808.4625

100 853.4875 808.4875

101 853.5125 808.5125

102 853.5375 808.5375

103 853.5625 808.5625

104 853.5875 808.5875

105 853.6125 808.6125

106 853.6375 808.6375

107 853.6625 808.6625

108 853.6875 808.6875

109 853.7125 808.7125

110 853.7375 808.7375

111 853.7625 808.7625

112 853.7875 808.7875

113 853.8125 808.8125

114 853.8375 808.8375

115 853.8625 808.8625

116 853.8875 808.8875

117 853.9125 808.9125

118 853.9375 808.9375

119 853.9625 808.9625

120 853.9875 808.9875

121 854.0125 809.0125

122 854.0375 809.0375

123 854.0625 809.0625

124 854.0875 809.0875

125 854.1125 809.1125

126 854.1375 809.1375

127 854.1625 809.1625

128 854.1875 809.1875

129 854.2125 809.2125

130 854.2375 809.2375

131 854.2625 809.2625

132 854.2875 809.2875

133 854.3125 809.3125

134 854.3375 809.3375

135 854.3625 809.3625

136 854.3875 809.3875

137 854.4125 809.4125

138 854.4375 809.4375

139 854.4625 809.4625

140 854.4875 809.4875

141 854.5125 809.5125

142 854.5375 809.5375

143 854.5625 809.5625

144 854.5875 809.5875

145 854.6125 809.6125

146 854.6375 809.6375

147 854.6625 809.6625

148 854.6875 809.6875

149 854.7125 809.7125

150 854.7375 809.7375

151 854.7625 809.7625

152 854.7875 809.7875

153 854.8125 809.8125

154 854.8375 809.8375

155 854.8625 809.8625

156 854.8875 809.8875

157 854.9125 809.9125

158 854.9375 809.9375

159 854.9625 809.9625

160 854.9875 809.9875

161 855.0125 810.0125

162 855.0375 810.0375

163 855.0625 810.0625

164 855.0875 810.0875

165 855.1125 810.1125

166 855.1375 810.1375

167 855.1625 810.1625

168 855.1875 810.1875

169 855.2125 810.2125

170 855.2375 810.2375

171 855.2625 810.2625

172 855.2875 810.2875

173 855.3125 810.3125

174 855.3375 810.3375

FCCChan.

No. Mobile Rx

Freq. Mobile Tx

Freq FCCChan.

No. Mobile Rx

Freq. Mobile Tx

Freq FCCChan.

No. Mobile Rx

Freq Mobile Tx

Freq

800 MHz Channels

TRANSCEIVER PROGRAMMING

3-24

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

175 855.3625 810.3625

176 855.3875 810.3875

177 855.4125 810.4125

178 855.4375 810.4375

179 855.4625 810.4625

180 855.4875 810.4875

181 855.5125 810.5125

182 855.5375 810.5375

183 855.5625 810.5625

184 855.5875 810.5875

185 855.6125 810.6125

186 855.6375 810.6375

187 855.6625 810.6625

188 855.6875 810.6875

189 855.7125 810.7125

190 855.7375 810.7375

191 855.7625 810.7625

192 855.7875 810.7875

193 855.8125 810.8125

194 855.8375 810.8375

195 855.8625 810.8625

196 855.8875 810.8875

197 855.9125 810.9125

198 855.9375 810.9375

199 855.9625 810.9625

200 855.9875 810.9875

201 856.0125 811.0125

202 856.0375 811.0375

203 856.0625 811.0625

204 856.0875 811.0875

205 856.1125 811.1125

206 856.1375 811.1375

207 856.1625 811.1625

208 856.1875 811.1875

209 856.2125 811.2125

210 856.2375 811.2375

211 856.2625 811.2625

212 856.2875 811.2875

213 856.3125 811.3125

214 856.3375 811.3375

215 856.3625 811.3625

216 856.3875 811.3875

217 856.4125 811.4125

218 856.4375 811.4375

219 856.4625 811.4625

220 856.4875 811.4875

221 856.5125 811.5125

222 856.5375 811.5375

223 856.5625 811.5625

224 856.5875 811.5875

225 856.6125 811.6125

226 856.6375 811.6375

227 856.6625 811.6625

228 856.6875 811.6875

229 856.7125 811.7125

230 856.7375 811.7375

231 856.7625 811.7625

232 856.7875 811.7875

233 856.8125 811.8125

234 856.8375 811.8375

235 856.8625 811.8625

236 856.8875 811.8875

237 856.9125 811.9125

238 856.9375 811.9375

239 856.9625 811.9625

240 856.9875 811.9875

241 857.0125 812.0125

242 857.0375 812.0375

243 857.0625 812.0625

244 857.0875 812.0875

245 857.1125 812.1125

246 857.1375 812.1375

247 857.1625 812.1625

248 857.1875 812.1875

249 857.2125 812.2125

250 857.2375 812.2375

251 857.2625 812.2625

252 857.2875 812.2875

253 857.3125 812.3125

254 857.3375 812.3375

255 857.3625 812.3625

256 857.3875 812.3875

257 857.4125 812.4125

258 857.4375 812.4375

259 857.4625 812.4625

260 857.4875 812.4875

261 857.5125 812.5125

262 857.5375 812.5375

263 857.5625 812.5625

264 857.5875 812.5875

265 857.6125 812.6125

266 857.6375 812.6375

267 857.6625 812.6625

268 857.6875 812.6875

269 857.7125 812.7125

270 857.7375 812.7375

271 857.7625 812.7625

272 857.7875 812.7875

273 857.8125 812.8125

274 857.8375 812.8375

275 857.8625 812.8625

276 857.8875 812.8875

277 857.9125 812.9125

278 857.9375 812.9375

279 857.9625 812.9625

280 857.9875 812.9875

281 858.0125 813.0125

282 858.0375 813.0375

283 858.0625 813.0625

284 858.0875 813.0875

285 858.1125 813.1125

286 858.1375 813.1375

287 858.1625 813.1625

288 858.1875 813.1875

289 858.2125 813.2125

290 858.2375 813.2375

291 858.2625 813.2625

292 858.2875 813.2875

293 858.3125 813.3125

294 858.3375 813.3375

295 858.3625 813.3625

296 858.3875 813.3875

297 858.4125 813.4125

298 858.4375 813.4375

299 858.4625 813.4625

300 858.4875 813.4875

301 858.5125 813.5125

302 858.5375 813.5375

303 858.5625 813.5625

304 858.5875 813.5875

305 858.6125 813.6125

306 858.6375 813.6375

307 858.6625 813.6625

308 858.6875 813.6875

309 858.7125 813.7125

310 858.7375 813.7375

311 858.7625 813.7625

312 858.7875 813.7875

313 858.8125 813.8125

314 858.8375 813.8375

315 858.8625 813.8625

316 858.8875 813.8875

317 858.9125 813.9125

318 858.9375 813.9375

319 858.9625 813.9625

320 858.9875 813.9875

321 859.0125 814.0125

322 859.0375 814.0375

323 859.0625 814.0625

324 859.0875 814.0875

FCCChan.

No. Mobile Rx

Freq. Mobile Tx

Freq FCCChan.

No. Mobile Rx

Freq. Mobile Tx

Freq FCCChan.

No. Mobile Rx

Freq Mobile Tx

Freq

800 MHz Channels

TRANSCEIVER PROGRAMMING

3-25 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

325 859.1125 814.1125

326 859.1375 814.1375

327 859.1625 814.1625

328 859.1875 814.1875

329 859.2125 814.2125

330 859.2375 814.2375

331 859.2625 814.2625

332 859.2875 814.2875

333 859.3125 814.3125

334 859.3375 814.3375

335 859.3625 814.3625

336 859.3875 814.3875

337 859.4125 814.4125

338 859.4375 814.4375

339 859.4625 814.4625

340 859.4875 814.4875

341 859.5125 814.5125

342 859.5375 814.5375

343 859.5625 814.5625

344 859.5875 814.5875

345 859.6125 814.6125

346 859.6375 814.6375

347 859.6625 814.6625

348 859.6875 814.6875

349 859.7125 814.7125

350 859.7375 814.7375

351 859.7625 814.7625

352 859.7875 814.7875

353 859.8125 814.8125

354 859.8375 814.8375

355 859.8625 814.8625

356 859.8875 814.8875

357 859.9125 814.9125

358 859.9375 814.9375

359 859.9625 814.9625

360 859.9875 814.9875

361 860.0125 815.0125

362 860.0375 815.0375

363 860.0625 815.0625

364 860.0875 815.0875

365 860.1125 815.1125

366 860.1375 815.1375

367 860.1625 815.1625

368 860.1875 815.1875

369 860.2125 815.2125

370 860.2375 815.2375

371 860.2625 815.2625

372 860.2875 815.2875

373 860.3125 815.3125

374 860.3375 815.3375

375 860.3625 815.3625

376 860.3875 815.3875

377 860.4125 815.4125

378 860.4375 815.4375

379 860.4625 815.4625

380 860.4875 815.4875

381 860.5125 815.5125

382 860.5375 815.5375

383 860.5625 815.5625

384 860.5875 815.5875

385 860.6125 815.6125

386 860.6375 815.6375

387 860.6625 815.6625

388 860.6875 815.6875

389 860.7125 815.7125

390 860.7375 815.7375

391 860.7625 815.7625

392 860.7875 815.7875

393 860.8125 815.8125

394 860.8375 815.8375

395 860.8625 815.8625

396 860.8875 815.8875

397 860.9125 815.9125

398 860.9375 815.9375

399 860.9625 815.9625

400 860.9875 815.9875

401 861.0125 816.0125

402 861.0375 816.0375

403 861.0625 816.0625

404 861.0875 816.0875

405 861.1125 816.1125

406 861.1375 816.1375

407 861.1625 816.1625

408 861.1875 816.1875

409 861.2125 816.2125

410 861.2375 816.2375

411 861.2625 816.2625

412 861.2875 816.2875

413 861.3125 816.3125

414 861.3375 816.3375

415 861.3625 816.3625

416 861.3875 816.3875

417 861.4125 816.4125

418 861.4375 816.4375

419 861.4625 816.4625

420 861.4875 816.4875

421 861.5125 816.5125

422 861.5375 816.5375

423 861.5625 816.5625

424 861.5875 816.5875

425 861.6125 816.6125

426 861.6375 816.6375

427 861.6625 816.6625

428 861.6875 816.6875

429 861.7125 816.7125

430 861.7375 816.7375

431 861.7625 816.7625

432 861.7875 816.7875

433 861.8125 816.8125

434 861.8375 816.8375

435 861.8625 816.8625

436 861.8875 816.8875

437 861.9125 816.9125

438 861.9375 816.9375

439 861.9625 816.9625

440 861.9875 816.9875

441 862.0125 817.0125

442 862.0375 817.0375

443 862.0625 817.0625

444 862.0875 817.0875

445 862.1125 817.1125

446 862.1375 817.1375

447 862.1625 817.1625

448 862.1875 817.1875

449 862.2125 817.2125

450 862.2375 817.2375

451 862.2625 817.2625

452 862.2875 817.2875

453 862.3125 817.3125

454 862.3375 817.3375

455 862.3625 817.3625

456 862.3875 817.3875

457 862.4125 817.4125

458 862.4375 817.4375

459 862.4625 817.4625

460 862.4875 817.4875

461 862.5125 817.5125

462 862.5375 817.5375

463 862.5625 817.5625

464 862.5875 817.5875

465 862.6125 817.6125

466 862.6375 817.6375

467 862.6625 817.6625

468 862.6875 817.6875

469 862.7125 817.7125

470 862.7375 817.7375

471 862.7625 817.7625

472 862.7875 817.7875

473 862.8125 817.8125

474 862.8375 817.8375

FCCChan.

No. Mobile Rx

Freq. Mobile Tx

Freq FCCChan.

No. Mobile Rx

Freq. Mobile Tx

Freq FCCChan.

No. Mobile Rx

Freq Mobile Tx

Freq

800 MHz Channels

TRANSCEIVER PROGRAMMING

3-26

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

475 862.8625 817.8625

476 862.8875 817.8875

477 862.9125 817.9125

478 862.9375 817.9375

479 862.9625 817.9625

480 862.9875 817.9875

481 863.0125 818.0125

482 863.0375 818.0375

483 863.0625 818.0625

484 863.0875 818.0875

485 863.1125 818.1125

486 863.1375 818.1375

487 863.1625 818.1625

488 863.1875 818.1875

489 863.2125 818.2125

490 863.2375 818.2375

491 863.2625 818.2625

492 863.2875 818.2875

493 863.3125 818.3125

494 863.3375 818.3375

495 863.3625 818.3625

496 863.3875 818.3875

497 863.4125 818.4125

498 863.4375 818.4375

499 863.4625 818.4625

500 863.4875 818.4875

501 863.5125 818.5125

502 863.5375 818.5375

503 863.5625 818.5625

504 863.5875 818.5875

505 863.6125 818.6125

506 863.6375 818.6375

507 863.6625 818.6625

508 863.6875 818.6875

509 863.7125 818.7125

510 863.7375 818.7375

511 863.7625 818.7625

512 863.7875 818.7875

513 863.8125 818.8125

514 863.8375 818.8375

515 863.8625 818.8625

516 863.8875 818.8875

517 863.9125 818.9125

518 863.9375 818.9375

519 863.9625 818.9625

520 863.9875 818.9875

521 864.0125 819.0125

522 864.0375 819.0375

523 864.0625 819.0625

524 864.0875 819.0875

525 864.1125 819.1125

526 864.1375 819.1375

527 864.1625 819.1625

528 864.1875 819.1875

529 864.2125 819.2125

530 864.2375 819.2375

531 864.2625 819.2625

532 864.2875 819.2875

533 864.3125 819.3125

534 864.3375 819.3375

535 864.3625 819.3625

536 864.3875 819.3875

537 864.4125 819.4125

538 864.4375 819.4375

539 864.4625 819.4625

540 864.4875 819.4875

541 864.5125 819.5125

542 864.5375 819.5375

543 864.5625 819.5625

544 864.5875 819.5875

545 864.6125 819.6125

546 864.6375 819.6375

547 864.6625 819.6625

548 864.6875 819.6875

549 864.7125 819.7125

550 864.7375 819.7375

551 864.7625 819.7625

552 864.7875 819.7875

553 864.8125 819.8125

554 864.8375 819.8375

555 864.8625 819.8625

556 864.8875 819.8875

557 864.9125 819.9125

558 864.9375 819.9375

559 864.9625 819.9625

560 864.9875 819.9875

561 865.0125 820.0125

562 865.0375 820.0375

563 865.0625 820.0625

564 865.0875 820.0875

565 865.1125 820.1125

566 865.1375 820.1375

567 865.1625 820.1625

568 865.1875 820.1875

569 865.2125 820.2125

570 865.2375 820.2375

571 865.2625 820.2625

572 865.2875 820.2875

573 865.3125 820.3125

574 865.3375 820.3375

575 865.3625 820.3625

576 865.3875 820.3875

577 865.4125 820.4125

578 865.4375 820.4375

579 865.4625 820.4625

580 865.4875 820.4875

581 865.5125 820.5125

582 865.5375 820.5375

583 865.5625 820.5625

584 865.5875 820.5875

585 865.6125 820.6125

586 865.6375 820.6375

587 865.6625 820.6625

588 865.6875 820.6875

589 865.7125 820.7125

590 865.7375 820.7375

591 865.7625 820.7625

592 865.7875 820.7875

593 865.8125 820.8125

594 865.8375 820.8375

595 865.8625 820.8625

596 865.8875 820.8875

597 865.9125 820.9125

598 865.9375 820.9375

599 865.9625 820.9625

600 865.9875 820.9875

- 866.0000 821.0000

601 866.0125 821.0125

- 866.0250 821.0250

602 866.0375 821.0375

603 866.0500 821.0500

604 866.0625 821.0625

605 866.0750 821.0750

606 866.0875 821.0875

607 866.1000 821.1000

608 866.1125 821.1125

609 866.1250 821.1250

610 866.1375 821.1375

611 866.1500 821.1500

612 866.1625 821.1625

613 866.1750 821.1750

614 866.1875 821.1875

615 866.2000 821.2000

616 866.2125 821.2125

617 866.2250 821.2250

618 866.2375 821.2375

619 866.2500 821.2500

620 866.2625 821.2625

621 866.2750 821.2750

622 866.2875 821.2875

FCCChan.

No. Mobile Rx

Freq. Mobile Tx

Freq FCCChan.

No. Mobile Rx

Freq. Mobile Tx

Freq FCCChan.

No. Mobile Rx

Freq Mobile Tx

Freq

800 MHz Channels

TRANSCEIVER PROGRAMMING

3-27 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

623 866.3000 821.3000

624 866.3125 821.3125

625 866.3250 821.3250

626 866.3375 821.3375

627 866.3500 821.3500

628 866.3625 821.3625

629 866.3750 821.3750

630 866.3875 821.3875

631 866.4000 821.4000

632 866.4125 821.4125

633 866.4250 821.4250

634 866.4375 821.4375

635 866.4500 821.4500

636 866.4625 821.4625

637 866.4750 821.4750

638 866.4875 821.4875

- 866.5000 821.5000

639 866.5125 821.5125

- 866.5250 821.5250

640 866.5375 821.5375

641 866.5500 821.5500

642 866.5625 821.5625

643 866.5750 821.5750

644 866.5875 821.5875

645 866.6000 821.6000

646 866.6125 821.6125

647 866.6250 821.6250

648 866.6375 821.6375

649 866.6500 821.6500

650 866.6625 821.6625

651 866.6750 821.6750

652 866.6875 821.6875

653 866.7000 821.7000

654 866.7125 821.7125

655 866.7250 821.7250

656 866.7375 821.7375

657 866.7500 821.7500

658 866.7625 821.7625

659 866.7750 821.7750

660 866.7875 821.7875

661 866.8000 821.8000

662 866.8125 821.8125

663 866.8250 821.8250

664 866.8375 821.8375

665 866.8500 821.8500

666 866.8625 821.8625

667 866.8750 821.8750

668 866.8875 821.8875

669 866.9000 821.9000

670 866.9125 821.9125

671 866.9250 821.9250

672 866.9375 821.9375

673 866.9500 821.9500

674 866.9625 821.9625

675 866.9750 821.9750

676 866.9875 821.9875

- 867.0000 822.0000

677 867.0125 822.0125

- 867.0250 822.0250

678 867.0375 822.0375

679 867.0500 822.0500

680 867.0625 822.0625

681 867.0750 822.0750

682 867.0875 822.0875

683 867.1000 822.1000

684 867.1125 822.1125

685 867.1250 822.1250

686 867.1375 822.1375

687 867.1500 822.1500

688 867.1625 822.1625

689 867.1750 822.1750

690 867.1875 822.1875

691 867.2000 822.2000

692 867.2125 822.2125

693 867.2250 822.2250

694 867.2375 822.2375

695 867.2500 822.2500

696 867.2625 822.2625

697 867.2750 822.2750

698 867.2875 822.2875

699 867.3000 822.3000

700 867.3125 822.3125

701 867.3250 822.3250

702 867.3375 822.3375

703 867.3500 822.3500

704 867.3625 822.3625

705 867.3750 822.3750

706 867.3875 822.3875

707 867.4000 822.4000

708 867.4125 822.4125

709 867.4250 822.4250

710 867.4375 822.4375

711 867.4500 822.4500

712 867.4625 822.4625

713 867.4750 822.4750

714 867.4875 822.4875

- 867.5000 822.5000

715 867.5125 822.5125

- 867.5250 822.5250

716 867.5375 822.5375

717 867.5500 822.5500

718 867.5625 822.5625

719 867.5750 822.5750

720 867.5875 822.5875

721 867.6000 822.6000

722 867.6125 822.6125

723 867.6250 822.6250

724 867.6375 822.6375

725 867.6500 822.6500

726 867.6625 822.6625

727 867.6750 822.6750

728 867.6875 822.6875

729 867.7000 822.7000

730 867.7125 822.7125

731 867.7250 822.7250

732 867.7375 822.7375

733 867.7500 822.7500

734 867.7625 822.7625

735 867.7750 822.7750

736 867.7875 822.7875

737 867.8000 822.8000

738 867.8125 822.8125

739 867.8250 822.8250

740 867.8375 822.8375

741 867.8500 822.8500

742 867.8625 822.8625

743 867.8750 822.8750

744 867.8875 822.8875

745 867.9000 822.9000

746 867.9125 822.9125

747 867.9250 822.9250

748 867.9375 822.9375

749 867.9500 822.9500

750 867.9625 822.9625

751 867.9750 822.9750

752 867.9875 822.9875

- 868.0000 823.0000

753 868.0125 823.0125

- 868.0250 823.0250

754 868.0375 823.0375

755 868.0500 823.0500

756 868.0625 823.0625

757 868.0750 823.0750

758 868.0875 823.0875

759 868.1000 823.1000

760 868.1125 823.1125

761 868.1250 823.1250

762 868.1375 823.1375

763 868.1500 823.1500

764 868.1625 823.1625

FCCChan.

No. Mobile Rx

Freq. Mobile Tx

Freq FCCChan.

No. Mobile Rx

Freq. Mobile Tx

Freq FCCChan.

No. Mobile Rx

Freq Mobile Tx

Freq

800 MHz Channels

TRANSCEIVER PROGRAMMING

3-28

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

765 868.1750 823.1750

766 868.1875 823.1875

767 868.2000 823.2000

768 868.2125 823.2125

769 868.2250 823.2250

770 868.2375 823.2375

771 868.2500 823.2500

772 868.2625 823.2625

773 868.2750 823.2750

774 868.2875 823.2875

775 868.3000 823.3000

776 868.3125 823.3125

777 868.3250 823.3250

778 868.3375 823.3375

779 868.3500 823.3500

780 868.3625 823.3625

781 868.3750 823.3750

782 868.3875 823.3875

783 868.4000 823.4000

784 868.4125 823.4125

785 868.4250 823.4250

786 868.4375 823.4375

787 868.4500 823.4500

788 868.4625 823.4625

789 868.4750 823.4750

790 868.4875 823.4875

791 868.5000 823.5000

792 868.5125 823.5125

793 868.5250 823.5250

794 868.5375 823.5375

795 868.5500 823.5500

796 868.5625 823.5625

797 868.5750 823.5750

798 868.5875 823.5875

799 868.6000 823.6000

800 868.6125 823.6125

801 868.6250 823.6250

802 868.6375 823.6375

803 868.6500 823.6500

804 868.6625 823.6625

805 868.6750 823.6750

806 868.6875 823.6875

807 868.7000 823.7000

808 868.7125 823.7125

809 868.7250 823.7250

810 868.7375 823.7375

811 868.7500 823.7500

812 868.7625 823.7625

813 868.7750 823.7750

814 868.7875 823.7875

815 868.8000 823.8000

816 868.8125 823.8125

817 868.8250 823.8250

818 868.8375 823.8375

819 868.8500 823.8500

820 868.8625 823.8625

821 868.8750 823.8750

822 868.8875 823.8875

823 868.9000 823.9000

824 868.9125 823.9125

825 868.9250 823.9250

826 868.9375 823.9375

827 868.9500 823.9500

828 868.9625 823.9625

829 868.9750 823.9750

830 868.9875 823.9875

- 869.0000 824.0000

- 869.0125 824.0125

- 869.0250 824.0250

- 869.0375 824.0375

- 869.0500 824.0500

- 869.0625 824.0625

- 869.0750 824.0750

- 869.0875 824.0875

- 869.1000 824.1000

- 869.1125 824.1125

- 869.1250 824.1250

- 869.1375 824.1375

- 869.1500 824.1500

- 869.1625 824.1625

- 869.1750 824.1750

- 869.1875 824.1875

- 869.2000 824.2000

- 869.2125 824.2125

- 869.2250 824.2250

- 869.2375 824.2375

- 869.2500 824.2500

- 869.2625 824.2625

- 869.2750 824.2750

- 869.2875 824.2875

- 869.3000 824.3000

- 869.3125 824.3125

- 869.3250 824.3250

- 869.3375 824.3375

- 869.3500 824.3500

- 869.3625 824.3625

- 869.3750 824.3750

- 869.3875 824.3875

- 869.4000 824.4000

- 869.4125 824.4125

- 869.4250 824.4250

- 869.4375 824.4375

- 869.4500 824.4500

- 869.4625 824.4625

- 869.4750 824.4750

- 869.4875 824.4875

- 869.5000 824.5000

- 869.5125 824.5125

- 869.5250 824.5250

- 869.5375 824.5375

- 869.5500 824.5500

- 869.5625 824.5625

- 869.5750 824.5750

- 869.5875 824.5875

- 869.6000 824.6000

- 869.6125 824.6125

- 869.6250 824.6250

- 869.6375 824.6375

- 869.6500 824.6500

- 869.6625 824.6625

- 869.6750 824.6750

- 869.6875 824.6875

- 869.7000 824.7000

- 869.7125 824.7125

- 869.7250 824.7250

- 869.7375 824.7375

- 869.7500 824.7500

- 869.7625 824.7625

- 869.7750 824.7750

- 869.7875 824.7875

- 869.8000 824.8000

- 869.8125 824.8125

- 869.8250 824.8250

- 869.8375 824.8375

- 869.8500 824.8500

- 869.8625 824.8625

- 869.8750 824.8750

- 869.8875 824.8875

- 869.9000 824.9000

- 869.9125 824.9125

- 869.9250 824.9250

- 869.9375 824.9375

- 869.9500 824.9500

- 869.9625 824.9625

- 869.9750 824.9750

- 869.9875 824.9875

FCCChan.

No. Mobile Rx

Freq. Mobile Tx

Freq FCCChan.

No. Mobile Rx

Freq. Mobile Tx

Freq FCCChan.

No. Mobile Rx

Freq Mobile Tx

Freq

800 MHz Channels

4-1 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

SECTION 4 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

127($EORFNGLDJUDPRIWKH5)DQGORJLFXQLWVLV

ORFDWHGRQSDJH

4.1 POWER SWITCHING AND REGULATION

4.1.1 POWER SWITCHING

8QVZLWFKHGEDWWHU\YROWDJHLVDSSOLHGWRWKH

SRZHUDPSOLILHUPRGXOHDQGSRZHUFRQWUROFLUFXLWLQ

WKH5)XQLW2WKHUZLVHDOOSRZHULVVZLWFKHGE\

3FKDQQHO026)(7V4DQG4LQWKHORJLF

XQLW7KH/9&&VXSSO\LVSURGXFHGE\4DQGWKH

9&&VXSSO\LVSURGXFHGE\4:KHQWKHRQRII

VZLWFKLVWXUQHGRQWKHRXWSXWRIVZLWFKLQJWUDQVLVWRU

4JRHVORZZKLFKWXUQV4DQG4RQ7KLV

DSSOLHVVZLWFKHGYROWVWRYROWUHJXODWRUV,&

DQG,&WKHDXGLRDPSOLILHUVWDJHVDQGRWKHUSDUWV

RIWKHWUDQVFHLYHU

:KHQWKHSRZHUVZLWFKLVWXUQHGRIIWKHEDVHRI

4LVSXOOHGORZE\5ZKLFKWXUQV4RIIDQG

WKHFROOHFWRUJRHVKLJK+RZHYHUEHFDXVHRIGLRGH

'4DQG4GRQRWWXUQRIIXQWLO&

FKDUJHVWKURXJK57KLVSURYLGHVDVOLJKWWXUQRII

GHOD\WRJLYHWKHPLFURSURFHVVRUWLPHWRWDNHRYHU

SRZHURIIFRQWURO7KHPLFURSURFHVVRULPPHGLDWHO\

GHWHFWVSRZHUWXUQRIIE\PRQLWRULQJWKH2))5(4,

VLJQDORQSLQ,WWKHQFKDQJHVWKH2))5(4RXWSXW

RQSLQWRDKLJKOHYHOZKLFKWXUQV4DJDLQRQ

XQWLOFXUUHQWVHWWLQJVKDYHEHHQVDYHGWRPHPRU\DQG

RWKHUUHTXLUHGSRZHUGRZQIXQFWLRQVKDYHEHHQ

SHUIRUPHG

4.1.2 5-VOLT REGULATORS (IC401, IC402)

5HJXODWRU,&LQWKHORJLFXQLWSURYLGHVWKH

/9ORJLFVXSSO\DQGUHJXODWRU,&SURYLGHV

WKH9VXSSO\7KH9VXSSO\LVLQWXUQVZLWFKHG

E\44WRSURYLGHWKH5979DQG6

VXSSOLHV7KHVHWUDQVLVWRUVDUHFRQWUROOHGE\VLJQDOV

IURPWKHPLFURSURFHVVRU

7KHORZEDWWHU\GHWHFWVLJQDOLVSURYLGHGE\D

YROWDJHGLYLGHUIRUPHGE\5DQG57KHVH

UHVLVWRUVGLYLGHGRZQWKH99FFVXSSO\WRSURGXFH

WKH%$7,1VLJQDOWKDWLVDSSOLHGWRSLQRIWKH

PLFURSURFHVVRU

4.2 SYNTHESIZER DESCRIPTION

4.2.1 INTRODUCTION

7KHV\QWKHVL]HURXWSXWVLJQDOLVSURGXFHGE\D

9&29ROWDJH&RQWUROOHG2VFLOODWRULQWKH5)XQLW

7KH9&2IUHTXHQF\LVFRQWUROOHGE\D'&YROWDJH

SURGXFHGE\WKHSKDVHGHWHFWRULQV\QWKHVL]HUFKLS

,&7KHSKDVHGHWHFWRUVHQVHVWKHSKDVHDQG

IUHTXHQF\RIWKHWZRLQSXWVLJQDOV2QHVLJQDOLVWKH

UHIHUHQFHIUHTXHQF\IURP7&;2;DQGWKHRWKHULV

IURPWKH9&2,IWKHVHVLJQDOVDUHQRWWKHVDPH

IUHTXHQF\WKHSKDVHGHWHFWRUFKDQJHVWKH9&2

FRQWUROYROWDJHZKLFKFKDQJHVWKH9&2IUHTXHQF\

XQWLOERWKVLJQDOVDUHV\QFKURQL]HG7KH9&2LVWKHQ

³ORFNHG´RQIUHTXHQF\

&KDQQHOVDUHVHOHFWHGE\SURJUDPPLQJWKH

FRXQWHUVLQ,&WRGLYLGHE\GLIIHUHQWQXPEHUV7KLV

SURJUDPPLQJGDWDFRPHVIURPWKHPLFURSURFHVVRURQ

WKHORJLFERDUG7KHIUHTXHQF\VWDELOLW\RIWKHV\QWKH

VL]HULQERWKWKHUHFHLYHDQGWUDQVPLWPRGHVLVGHWHU

PLQHGE\WKHVWDELOLW\RI7&;2;7KHVWDELOLW\RI

WKLVGHYLFHLV330IURP±WR)±WR

&7KH9&2RXWSXWVLJQDOLVEXIIHUHGDQGWKHQ

IHGWRWKHUHFHLYHUDVWKHILUVWLQMHFWLRQVLJQDODQGWR

WKHWUDQVPLWWHUDVWKHWUDQVPLWVLJQDO

4.2.2 VCO (IC3), BUFFERS (Q10-Q12)

6XSSO\YROWDJHWR9&2,&LVIURP&39UHJX

ODWRU,&DQGDFWLYHILOWHU4RQWKH,)ERDUG4

IXQFWLRQVDVDFDSDFLWDQFHPXOWLSOLHUWRSURYLGH

ILOWHULQJRIWKHYROWVXSSO\WRWKH9&25DQG]HQHU

GLRGH'SURYLGHELDVDQG&SURYLGHVWKHFDSDFL

WDQFHWKDWLVPXOWLSOLHG,IDQRLVHSXOVHRURWKHU

YROWDJHFKDQJHDSSHDUVRQWKHFROOHFWRUWKHEDVH

YROWDJHGRHVQRWFKDQJHEHFDXVHRI&DQG'7KHUH

IRUHLWGRHVQRWDSSHDURQWKHHPLWWHU

7KH9&2FRQWUROYROWDJHLVDSSOLHGWRSLQRI

,&DQGWKHWUDQVPLWDXGLRGDWDPRGXODWLRQVLJQDOLV

DSSOLHGWRSLQ7KHPRGXODWLRQVLJQDOLVDOVRDSSOLHG

WRWKH7&;2DVGHVFULEHGLQWKHQH[WVHFWLRQ7KH

RXWSXWVLJQDORIWKH9&2RQSLQLVDSSOLHGWRD

7VSOLWWHUIRUPHGE\557KLVQHWZRUNURXWHVWKH

9&2VLJQDOWREXIIHUDPSOLILHUV44DQGDOVRWR

47KHVHVWDJHVSURYLGHDPSOLILFDWLRQDQGLVRODWH

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

4-2

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

the VCO from the receiver and transmitter and the

counters in synthesizer IC1.

A switching circuit on the output of Q10 routes

the VCO signal to the receiver in the receive mode and

the transmitter in the transmit mode. In the receive

mode, the R5V receive supply is applied to R12 and

current flows through R12, D7A, and R51. Since D7A

is forward biased, it presents a low impedance path to

first mixer Q2 in the receiver. D7C is then reverse

biased, so there is a high impedance path to the

transmitter.

The5VreceivesupplyisalsoappliedtoR78and

current flows through R78, D7B, and R79. This results

in less reverse bias and therefore charge on D7C to

permit faster switching. In the transmit mode, the 5V

receive supply is no longer present, so both D7A and

D7B are reverse biased. D7C is forward biased by the

current path through R50 and R51.

4.2.3 VCO AND TCXO MODULATION

Both the VCO and TCXO are modulated in order

to achieve the required frequency response. If only the

VCO was modulated, the phase detector in IC1 would

sense the frequency change and increase or decrease

the VCO control voltage to counteract the change

(especially at the lower audio frequencies).

Conversely, if only the TCXO was modulated, the

VCO frequency would not change fast enough (espe-

cially at the higher audio frequencies).

However, by modulating both the VCO and

TCXO, the two phase detector inputs remain in phase

and no frequency shift is sensed. This produces a rela-

tively flat audio response. Potentiometer B4 in IC209

is used to balance these signals and potentiometers B1

andB3areusedtosetthedataandaudiodeviation

level. IC4 is an amplifier, and R73 sets the frequency

of the TCXO by adjusting the DC bias of IC4.

4.2.4 SYNTHESIZER CHIP (IC1)

Synthesizer chip IC1 contains a prescaler, A, N,

and reference counters, and a phase detector. Chan-

nels are selected by programming the A, N, and refer-

ence counters to divide by a certain number. This

programming is performed by the microprocessor via

the serial data bus which consists of lines PLLSK,

PLLSO, and PLLST (pins 9-11 of IC1).

The divide numbers are chosen so that when the

VCO is operating at the correct frequency, the VCO-

derived input to the phase detector is the same

frequency as the TCXO-derived input. The TCXO-

derived input is produced by the reference counter in

IC1. This counter divides the 14.925 MHz TCXO

frequency by 2388 to produce a 6.25 kHz input to the

phase detector. Using a 6.25 kHz reference frequency

allows channels to be changed in 6.25 kHz steps.

The VCO-derived input is produced by dividing

the VCO frequency using the prescaler and N counter

in IC1. The divide number of the prescaler is

controlled by the output signal from the A counter.

The A and N counters function as follows:

Both the A and N counters begin counting down

from the programmed number. When the A counter

reaches zero, it halts until the N counter reaches zero.

Both counters then reset and the cycle repeats. The A

counter is always programmed with a smaller number

than the N counter. When the A counter is counting

down, the control output to the prescaler causes the

prescaler to divide by 129. Then when the A counter is

halted, the control output changes states and the pres-

caler divides by 128.

4.2.5 LOCK DETECT (Q13)

When the synthesizer is locked on frequency, the

LD (Lock Detect) output of IC1 (pin 7) is a high

signal. This turns lock detect transistor Q13 off and the

ULOCK signal fed to the microprocessor is low. When

an unlocked condition is indicated, low-going pulses

appear on pin 7. Q13 then turns on and the ULOCK

signal goes high. The transceiver is then disabled by

the logic and an error condition is indicated in the

display.

4.2.6 CHARGE PUMP (Q1, Q2), LOOP FILTER

The charge pump circuit consisting of Q1 and Q2

charges and discharges C4 and C5 in the loop filter to

produce the VCO control voltage. Supply voltage to

Q1 is provided by CPV regulator IC2 on the IF board.

Pulses which control the charge pump are output

by synthesizer IC1 on pins 15 and 16. When the VCO

is on the correct frequency, both phase detector

outputs are in phase. Pin 15 is then high and pin 16 is

low which turns both Q1 and Q2 off. Then if the VCO

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

4-3 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

frequency is low, the VCO-derived input to the phase

detector is lower than the TCXO-derived input (or the

phase lags the TCXO-derived input). Pin 15 of IC1

then pulses low and turns Q1 on. This charges the loop

filter capacitors which increases the VCO control

voltage. The VCO frequency then increases until the

phase detector inputs are again the same frequency and

phase. If the VCO frequency is too high, pin 16 pulses

high which discharges the loop filter capacitors.

The loop filter is formed by R7-R9 and C4/C5.

This is a low-pass filter which controls synthesizer

stability and lock-up time and suppresses the 6.25 kHz

reference frequency.

4.3 RECEIVER CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

NOTE: A block diagram of the RF and logic units is

located on page 8-3.

4.3.1 RF AMPLIFIER (Q1), FIRST MIXER (Q2)

The receive signal from the antenna is fed

through low-pass filter FI7 and the antenna switch (see

Section 4.4.2) to bandpass filter FI1. This filter attenu-

ates the image and other unwanted frequencies and

also prevents the injection signal from being fed out to

the antenna.

The signal is then fed to RF amplifier Q1. Imped-

ance matching with FI1 is provided by L32, C4, C138,

and R104. The RF amplifier is used to recover filter

losses and improve the sensitivity of the receiver. The

output of Q1 is fed to FI2 which is a bandpass filter

similar to FI1. Impedance matching is provided by L5

and C7.

From FI2 the signal is fed to gate 1 of first mixer

Q2.Thisisadual-gateMOSFETdevicewhichmixes

the receive frequency with the first injection frequency

to produce a first IF of 45.225 MHz (low-side injec-

tion is used). The injection frequency is from the

synthesizer, and it is fed through a low-pass filter

consisting of C22-C24 and L12. This filter attenuates

harmonic frequencies present in the injection signal. A

3-dB pad consisting of R9-R11 provides the required

input level to the mixer, and L11 and C12 provide

matching.

Impedance matching on the input of Q2 is

provided by C11, L6-L8, and L33. Likewise, imped-

ance matching on the output is provided by C15, L9,

L10, C18, C19, and R99. The first IF signal is then fed

to four-pole crystal filter FI3. This filter attenuates

wideband noise, adjacent channels, frequencies

resulting from intermodulation, and other frequencies

close to the receive channel.

Figure 4-1 Limiter/Mixer/Detector IC3

4.3.2 IF AMPLIFIER (Q2), LIMITER/DETECTOR

(IC3)

From crystal filter FI3, the IF signal is fed to IF

amplifier Q2 on the IF board. This stage provides the

required input level to the next stage. The signal is

then fed to limiter/detector IC3. This device contains

second mixer and oscillator, limiter, detector, squelch,

and RSSI stages (see Figure 4-1).

The IF signal is fed in on pin 16 which is the

input of an internal mixer.The 45.225 MHz first IF

signal is mixed with the 44.775 MHz second injection

signal to produce a second IF of 450 kHz. The 44.775

injection signal is produced by multiplying the TCXO

frequency by three. This multiplication is performed

by Q18 and other components.

The 450 kHz second IF is fed out of IC3 on pin 3

and applied to ceramic filters FI6, FI5, and FI4. These

filters are used to attenuate wideband noise. A

switching network consisting of D13-D16 routes the

IF signal through all three filters with narrow band and

NPSPAC operation, and through only FI4 with wide-

band operation. This switching network is controlled

by WIDE and NAR signals from Q19-Q21. The W/N

44.775 MHz

2nd Injection 1

Oscillator

Mixer

Limiter-Amp

Quad.

45.225

450 kHz 2nd IF MHz

1st IF

44.775

MHz

FI4, FI5,

Ceramic Filters

FI6

Audio

RSSI

Noise Det

Amp Out

Out

Detector

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

4-4

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

input signal to these transistors is high for narrow

band channels. Therefore, with narrow band chan-

nels, D14/D16 are forward biased and D13/D15

reverse biased and vice versa for wideband channels.

The450kHzsignalfromthesefiltersisthenfed

backintoIC3onpin5andappliedtoalimiter-

amplifier stage. From the limiter the signal is fed to

the quadrature detector. An external phase-shift

network connected to pins 10 and 11 shifts the phase

of one of the detector inputs by 90° at 450 kHz (the

other inputs are unshifted in phase). This network

consists of C17 and ceramic discriminator X1. The

detector is adjusted for wide and narrow band chan-

nels by Q3, R8, and C16. The detected audio signal is

then amplified and fed out of IC3 on pin 9.

4.3.3 SQUELCH CIRCUIT (IC4A/B, IC5A)

The audio output signal on pin 9 of IC3 contains

audio and also high-frequency noise. This signal is fed

to the receive audio and data processing circuits on the

logic board (Section 4.6.1) and also to the squelch

circuit. The amount of noise in this signal tends to be

inversely proportional to signal strength (the higher

the noise level, the lower the signal strength and vice

versa). Therefore, it can be used for squelch control.

A bandpass filter that passes only noise frequen-

cies occurring above the audio band is formed by an

op amp in IC3 and external components. The input to

this filter is pin 8 and frequency determining compo-

nents (R17-R19, C20, C21) are connected to pin 7.

Other components on the input such as Q4 provide

frequency and wide/narrow band compensation, and

thermistors R14/R26 provide temperature compensa-

tion. The input audio/noise level is adjusted by R13.

The detected noise output on pin 13 of IC3 is applied

to pin 32 of the microprocessor in the logic unit.

4.4 TRANSMITTER DESCRIPTION

NOTE: A block diagram of the RF and logic units is

located on page 8-3.

4.4.1 AMPLIFIER (Q9), DRIVER (Q8)

In the transmit mode, the VCO output signal is

the transmit frequency. It is switched to the transmitter

by the switching circuit consisting of D7 and other

components (see Section 4.2.2) and applied to ampli-

fier Q9. Power to this stage and also Q8 is the 7.5-volt

battery supply switched by Q16 and Q17. This switch

is controlled by the switched T5V supply. Therefore,

when the transmit mode is selected, the TX5V supply

goes high which causes the output of Q17 to go low

and turn switch Q16 on.

The output signal from Q9 is fed to driver Q8

which provides additional amplification. Impedance

matching with IC1 is provided by L15, C62, and a

resistive pad consisting of R41-R43. Power amplifier

module IC1 provides up to 3 watts of RF power at the

antenna jack. It contains three internal amplifier

stages, each of which has a separate supply voltage

(VCC1-VCC3). The supply voltage to the first stage

(VCC1) is from the power control circuit, and the

supply voltage to the last two stages (VCC2/VCC3) is

the unswitched battery supply.

4.4.2 ANTENNA SWITCH AND LOW-PASS

FILTER

The antenna is switched between the receiver and

transmitter by an antenna switch consisting of D11,

D1-D3, and several other components. In the transmit

mode, the TMUT input on pin 2 of Q7 is high. The

T5V supply on pin 4 then appears on pin 3 and current

flows through R20, L14, D11, D3, and L1/D1 and

L2/D2. Since D11 and D3 are forward biased, the

transmit signal has a low impedance path to the

antenna.

L14/C31, L1/C2/D1, and L2/D2/C17 each form

discrete quarter-wave line that is AC grounded at one

end. When one end of a quarter-wave line is AC

grounded, the other end presents a high impedance to

the quarter-wave frequency. Therefore, L14/C31

isolate the 5-volt battery supply from transmitter RF,

and the other two circuits isolate the receiver. In the

receive mode, D11 and D1-D3 are no longer forward

biased. Therefore, the receive signal has a high-

impedance path into the transmitter and a low-imped-

ance path into the receiver. From the antenna switch

the transmit signal is fed to low-pass filter FI7. This

filter attenuates harmonic frequencies occurring above

the transmit band.

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

4-5 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

4.4.3 POWER CONTROL (IC2A/B)

The power output circuit maintains a steady

power output level by controlling the supply voltage to

the first stage in power module IC1 (VCC1). The

output power is monitored using a directional coupler

consisting of L34, L13, C33, C35, D4, D5, and several

other components. Reflected (reverse) power is

detected by L13/D5, and forward power is detected by

L12/D4. These couplers produce a DC voltage that is

proportional to the reverse or forward power.

The forward power signal is amplified by IC2A

and is combined with the reverse power signal on pin

6 of IC2B. If there is no reverse power being detected,

IC2B amplifies only the difference between the

forward power signal on pin 6 and the reference

voltage on pin 5. This reference voltage controls the

power output, and it is set by the control logic through

potentiometer 2 in IC209 in the logic unit.

As forward or reverse power increases, the output

voltage on pin 7 decreases. Q5 and Q6 then turn off

more which decreases the supply voltage applied to

VCC1 of IC1. Power then decreases to maintain a

stable output. The opposite occurs if forward or

reverse power decrease. The power decrease resulting

from an increase in reverse power prevents transmitter

damage which may result if excessive power is

reflected back into the transmitter. This may occur, for

example, if the transmitter is keyed with a defective

antenna.

4.5 CONTROL LOGIC AND DISPLAY

NOTE: A block diagram of the RF and logic units is

located on page 8-3.

4.5.1 CONTROL LOGIC

The digital control logic is based on 8-bit CMOS

microprocessor IC306. The operating speed is set by

9.8304 MHz crystal X2. A clock shift signal applied

through D301. This signal goes high to shift the clock

frequency slightly when the second harmonic inter-

feres with the receive signal.

A serial data bus formed by MSI, MSO, and

MSCK (pins 49-51) is used to transfer data to and

from two external devices. They are 16K x 8

EEPROM IC304 and DTMF encoder IC303. Another

serial port formed by XTXD and XRXD is used to

transfer programming data to and from an external

computer. This port is fed out of the transceiver on

pins 6 and 7 of the accessory connector. Descriptions

of the IC306 pins are located in Table 4-1.

4.5.2 DISPLAY ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION

IC1 on the display board is an intelligent LCD

display controller/driver. It communicates with the

microprocessor on the logic board over a serial bus

consisting of MSCK (serial clock) and MSO (serial

data), and DISST (display strobe) signals. IC1 is set

for 1/3 bias and 1/5 duty cycle and drives an 8-char-

acter, 14-segment display at a 98 Hz frame frequency.

The LCD display (DS6) has 127 segments that are

driven by a 34-segment signal with 4 common lines.

4.6 RECEIVE AUDIO PROCESSING

4.6.1 BANDPASS FILTER (IC101)

The receive audio and data signal from the IF

module in the RF unit is called DET. It is applied to

IC101 in the receive audio circuit, IC102 in the receive

data circuit, and IC110 in the SMARTNET data

circuit. The receive audio circuit operates as follows,

and the other circuits are described in later sections.

The DET signal is applied to IC101 which is a

bandpass filter which passes frequencies from 300-

3000 Hz. This attenuates Call Guard (CTCSS/DCS)

signaling and high-frequency harmonics. This filter

also provides de-emphasis of the audio signal.

On the input of IC101, pin 1 of Q110 is low in the

wideband mode and high in the narrow band mode.

Therefore, R102 is grounded in the wideband mode to

lower the input level to IC101. This maintains a

constant audio output level since the higher deviation

in the wideband mode results in a higher input level.

Also on the input of IC101, the NPSPAC line control-

ling Q111 is high when a NPSPAC channel is selected

and low at other times. This grounds R167 in the

NPSPAC mode to lower the input level since NPSPAC

channel deviation is higher than narrow band

deviation.

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

4-6

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

Table 4-1 Microprocessor IC306 Pin Descriptions

Name Port Name Input or

Output Description Active High

or Low

1 RES Input Reset pulse input -

2 XTAL Input System clock connection terminal -

3 EXTAL Input System clock connection terminal -

4 FWE Input Not used -

5 MDI Input Flash ROM data import control (L=load) Low

6MDO -Notused -

7 NMI - Not used (external pull-up) -

8STBY -Notused -

9 VCC - Supply voltage -

10 CSHIFT Output Clock shift control (H=shift) High

11 - - Not used -

12 INTS I/O - -

13 RxD - Not used (external pull-up) -

14 TxD - Not used (external pull-up) -

15 VSS - Ground -

16 DTMFSO Output Segment data for LCD driver -

17 EXTDC Input Option signal input -

18 DTMFCK Output Clock signal for LDC driver -

19 - - - -

20 FCN Input FCN button switch Low

21 AUX Input AUX button switch Low

22 DPOTST Output Digi-pot strobe signal -

23 OFFREQI Input Main voltage supply switch Low

24 QSELOI Input Channel select switch input -

25 - - - -

26 SN_RX Input SMARTNET receive data input -

27 TXDATA Output Subaudible tone/main audio signal out -

28 RXDATA Input Receive data input -

29 BWC Output Transmit/receive data filter bandwidth signal output High

30 KEYR3 Input Key matrix scan in -

31 KeyR2 Input Key matrix scan in -

32 NOISE Input Noise pulse input/squelch control -

33 MMUTE Output Mutes microphone audio signal (L=mute) Low

34 TXPREC Output Subaudible signaling tone/damp signal output -

35 TEST Output Bypass transmit data filter (H=Normal/no bypass) High

36 L5V - Supply voltage -

37 L5V - Supply voltage -

38 BATIN Input Low battery voltage detection -

39 RSSI Input RSSI (Receive Signal Strength Indicator) -

40 - - - -

41 - - - -

42 - - - -

43 - - - -

44 - - - -

45 - - - -

46 VSS - Ground -

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

4-7 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

 .(<5 ,QSXW .H\PDWUL[VFDQ 

 .(<5 ,QSXW .H\PDWUL[VFDQ 

 062 2XWSXW 6HULDOGDWDRXWSXW 

 06, ,QSXW 6HULDOGDWDLQSXW 

 06&. 2XWSXW 6HULDOGDWDFORFN 

 5& 2XWSXW 59VXSSO\FRQWUROVLJQDO +LJK

 %((3 2XWSXW $XGLREHHSWRQH 

 7& 2XWSXW 79VXSSO\FRQWUROVLJQDO +LJK

 7087 2XWSXW $XWRPDWLF3RZHU&RQWURO$3&FLUFXLWFRQWUROVLJQDO +LJK

 1363$& 2XWSXW &RQWUROV1363$&FKDQQHODXGLROHYHO+ 1363$&FKDQQHO +LJK

    

    

 /9  6XSSO\YROWDJH

 8/2&. ,QSXW 3//XQORFNHGVLJQDO+ XQORFNHG +LJK

 7$ 2XWSXW 7DONDURXQGPRGHFRQWUROVLJQDO/ WDONDURXQG /RZ

 3//67 2XWSXW 3//VWUREH 

 3//62 2XWSXW 3//GDWD 

 3//6. 2XWSXW 3//FORFN 

 :1 2XWSXW :LGHQDUURZEDQGVZLWFKLQJ+ QDUURZEDQG +LJK

 37 2XWSXW &RPSDQGHUFRQWUROVLJQDO/ DFWLYH /RZ

 ',667 2XWSXW /&'GULYHUFKLSHQDEOHVLJQDO 

 ',6(1 2XWSXW /&'GULYHUFKLSHQDEOHVLJQDO 

    

 966  *URXQG 

 966  *URXQG 

    

 2))54 2XWSXW 3RZHURIIFRQWUROVLJQDO+ KROGSRZHURQ /RZ

 .(<6 2XWSXW .H\SDGPDWUL[VFDQ 

 .(<6 2XWSXW .H\SDGPDWUL[VFDQ 

 .(<6 2XWSXW .H\SDGPDWUL[VFDQ 

 .(<6 2XWSXW .H\SDGPDWUL[VFDQ 

 &/5&2'( 2XWSXW 2SWLRQDOHQFU\SWLRQFRQWUROVLJQDO /RZ

 237% 2XWSXW 2SWLRQVLJQDO /RZ

 %$7/(' 2XWSXW %$7/('FRQWUROVLJQDO/ /('RQ /RZ

 %./(' 2XWSXW /&'EDFNOLJKWFRQWUROVLJQDO/ EDFNOLJKWRQ /RZ

 '70)07 2XWSXW '70)PXWHFRQWUROVLJQDO/ PXWH /RZ

    

 5087 2XWSXW 5HFHLYHDXGLRPXWHFRQWUROVLJQDO/ UHFHLYHDXGLRPXWH /RZ

 $087 2XWSXW $XGLRDPSOLILHUVXSSO\YROWDJHFRQWURO+ HQDEOHG +LJK

 46(/ ,QSXW &KDQQHOVHOHFWVZLWFKVLJQDO 

 46(/ ,QSXW &KDQQHOVHOHFWVZLWFKVLJQDO 

 46(/ ,QSXW &KDQQHOVHOHFWVZLWFKVLJQDO 

 46(/ ,QSXW &KDQQHOVHOHFWVZLWFKVLJQDO 

 %6</(' 2XWSXW %86</('FRQWUROVLJQDO/ /('RQ /RZ

 7;/(' 2XWSXW 7;/('FRQWUROVLJQDO//('RQ /RZ

 966  *URXQG 

Table 4-1 Microprocessor IC306 Pin Descriptions (Continued)

3LQ

1DPH 3RUW1DPH ,QSXWRU

2XWSXW 'HVFULSWLRQ $FWLYH+LJK

RU/RZ

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

4-8

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

93 S5C Output RF 5C supply control signal High

94 - - - -

95 SN_TR Output SMARTNET circuit control signal (H=SMARTNET Tx Data) High

96 EEPCS Output EEPROM chip select signal -

97 XTXD Output Programming data out -

98 XRXD Input Programming data in -

99 PTTIN Input PTT switch Low

100 - - - -

Table 4-1 Microprocessor IC306 Pin Descriptions (Continued)

Name Port Name Input or

Output Description Active High

or Low

4.6.2 EXPANDER (IC208)

From this filter the signal is fed to pin 7 of the

expander in IC208. When companding is enabled by a

low input on the PT input of IC208, this stage provides

1:2 expansion of the audio signal to remove the 2:1

compression that occurred when it was transmitted.

This compression and then expansion reduces the

amount of noise present in the audio signal. When the

PT input is high, companding is disabled and the

signal if fed through IC208 without expansion. NOTE:

Companding is not currently used with this radio.

The audio signal is fed out of IC208 on pin 15

and then fed to audio mute gate IC103. This gate is

controlled by the RMUTE output (pin 84) of the

microprocessor. The audio is also muted by the audio

amplifier as described in the information which

follows.

4.6.3 AUDIO AMPLIFIER (IC104-IC106)

From gate IC103, the audio signal is fed to

volume control R117 which sets the input level to the

audio amplifiers. Also applied at this point are the

DTMF and beep tones. Muting of the DTMF tones is

provided by Q101 which is controlled by the

DTMFMT output (pin 82) of the microprocessor. The

beep tones are synthesized by the BEEP output (pin

53) of the microprocessor.

The input level to the audio amplifiers is also

controlled by Q112 which lowers the input level by

grounding R168. Both the NPSPAC and W/B (wide/

narrow band) lines control Q112. Resistor R168 is

grounded only in the narrow band/non-NPSPAC mode

(see preceding information for line levels).

With normal operation when the internal speaker

is used, IC105 and IC106 provide the required amplifi-

cation. However, when an external speaker-micro-

phone is connected to pin 1 of the accessory jack (a

load of approximately 1k ohm or less), Q102 and

Q105 turn on and Q109 turns off. This disables IC105

and IC106, and enables IC104.

The supply voltage to all three audio amplifier

stages is controlled by Q106 and Q107. When the

audio is muted such as when no tones are sounding or

no message is being received, the AMUT output of the

microprocessor (pin 85) is low. This turns off both

Q106 and Q107 and removes supply voltage from the

audio amplifiers. This helps conserve battery power.

The receive audio signal is also muted by gate IC103

as previously described.

4.7 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT DATA

PROCESSING

4.7.1 RECEIVE DATA FILTER/DETECTOR

(IC102A/B, IC107A/B)

The receive data (and audio) signal (DET) from

the IF board is also routed to the receive data filter

formed by IC102B and IC102A. This is a low-pass

filter which attenuates voice and other harmonic

frequencies above the data band.

The passband of this filter is controlled by the

BWC signal applied to Q103. When digital Call Guard

data or a low-frequency Call Guard tone is being

detected, the BWC signal is high which turns on

Q103. The cut-off frequency of the filter is then

approximately 150 Hz. Then when a high-frequency

Call Guard tone is received, Q103 turns off and the

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

4-9 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

cut-off frequency is approximately 190 Hz. Q103

lowers the cut-off frequency of the filter by switching

additional capacitance into the filter.

From the filter the data signal is applied to a DC

restoration circuit formed by IC107B and IC107A.

This circuit converts the data signal from AC floating

at half supply to a digital signal at 0- and 5-volt levels

that can be read by the microprocessor. IC107B is a

standard noninverting amplifier with a gain of approx-

imately 5.6 set by R139 and R140 (R140 is AC

grounded by C129). Diodes D101 and D102 charge

and discharge C129 to establish a DC reference on

pins 2 and 6 of IC107 that is the average of the posi-

tive and negative going alternations of the data signal.

The amplified data signal is applied to pin 3 of

IC107A. When this level rises above the reference

level on pin 2, the output on pin 1 goes high (5 volts).

Conversely, when the data signal falls below the refer-

ence level, the output goes low (0 volts). In the

transmit mode, Q104 is turned on which effectively

grounds pin 3 of IC107A and forces the output on

pin 1 low.

4.7.2 TRANSMIT DATA FILTER (IC206B/

IC206A)

Thetransmitdatasignalisproducedbythe

TXDATA and TXPREC outputs of the micropro-

cessor (pins 27 and 34, see Table 4-1). A pseudo sine

wave is produced by the four voltage levels that can be

produced by these outputs. This signal is fed to a

transmit data filter formed by IC206B and IC206A.

This filter is the same as receive data filter IC102B

and IC102A described in the preceding section. This

filter attenuates harmonics present in the waveform

produced by the microprocessor.

The output and input of the data filter is fed to

gate IC203. This gate is used to bypass the transmit

data circuit during alignment so that a wide range of

harmonic frequencies are passed for use in setting

modulation balance. The control signal to this gate is

the TEST signal from pin 35 of the microprocessor.

This signal is low when the transmit data filter is

bypassed.

Thesignalisthenroutedtopin7orgateIC210

which selects either it or the SMARTNET data signal

from IC113B. The data output signal on IC210, pin 1

is then applied to pin 24 of IC209 which is the input to

one of the digitally controlled potentiometers in that

device. The data modulation level is set during align-

ment and controlled by the logic. The output on pins

22 and 23 is then fed to IC201 where it is combined

with the transmit audio signal (see Section 4.8.3).

4.8 TRANSMIT AUDIO PROCESSING

4.8.1 GATE (IC204), HIGH-PASS FILTER

(IC202)

The microphone audio signal is applied to pin 2

of one of the gates in IC204. This signal may come

from the internal microphone or an external micro-

phone connected to pin 8 of the accessory connector.

This gate is controlled by the MMUTE signal from pin

33 or the microprocessor. When this signal is low, the

microphone audio signal is muted.

The transmit DTMF tone is applied to pin 6 of

IC204 which is the input of the other gate in that

device. This gate is controlled by the DTMFMT signal

from pin 82 of the microprocessor, and when that

signal is low, the DTMF tone is muted.

The transmit audio and DTMF signals are then

combined and applied to pin 3 of compandor IC208.

When companding is enabled by a low input on the PT

input of IC208, this stage provides 2:1 compression of

the audio signal. This compression and then re-expan-

sion when it is received reduces the amount of noise

present in the audio signal. When the PT input of

IC208 is high, companding is disabled and the signal

is fed through IC208 without compression. NOTE:

Companding is not currently used with this radio.

The transmit audio/DTMF signal is fed out of

IC208 on pin 2 and applied to a high-pass filter formed

by IC202A. This filter has a –3 dB cutoff frequency of

approximately 300 Hz to attenuate frequencies that

could cause interference with the Call Guard signals.*

4.8.2 LIMITER (IC202B)

Pre-emphasis of the DTMF tone or microphone

audio signals is provided by C205/ R211. IC202B is

an amplifier functioning as a limiter (limiting occurs

when it saturates). Limiting prevents overmodulation

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

4-10

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

caused by high input levels from the internal or

external microphone. The bias voltage to this stage

and also to IC201A is produced by voltage divider

R208/R207.

4.8.3 LOW-PASS FILTER (IC205A/B)

IC205A and IC205B form a low-pass splatter

filter which attenuates frequencies above approxi-

mately 3 kHz. This prevents adjacent channel interfer-

ence caused by the harmonic frequencies which result

from amplitude limiting.

The output signal from this filter is applied to

IC209 which contains four logic-controlled potentio-

meters. The transmit audio signal is applied to potenti-

ometer3onpin20andfedoutonpin19whichisthe

wiper of that potentiometer. The potentiometers in this

device are adjusted by the control logic via the serial

data bus (MSCK/MSO). The transmit audio/DTMF

level is set when the transceiver is aligned.

The transmit audio/DTMF signal is then fed to

IC201 where it is combined with the transmit data/

SMARTNET data signal if applicable. The output

signal on pin 4 of IC201 is then fed to the VCO in the

RFunitandalsotopins7and8ofIC209.Thesignal

fed to the RF unit (MOD) modulates the VCO, and the

signal fed to IC209 is level adjusted and fed out on pin

6 and applied to the RF unit where it modulates the

TCXO. The potentiometer is set by the logic during

alignment, and is used to balance the VCO and TCXO

modulation signals.

4.9 SMARTNET DATA PROCESSING

Both the transmit and receive SMARTNET/

SmartZone data signals are applied to a filter formed

by IC112A/B and IC113B. Switching of these signals

is provided by gate IC110 which is controlled by the

SN_TR signal from pin 95 of the microprocessor.

When this signal is high, the transmit data signal on

pin6isselectedisroutedtothefilter,andwhenitis

low the receive data signal on pin 7 is routed to the

filter.

IC112B, IC112A, and IC113B form a 1800 Hz

low-pass filter which attenuates unwanted frequencies

above the SMARTNET/SmartZone data band. The

output of this filter on U113B, pin 7 is then fed to

IC114A/B which provide DC restoration when data is

being received. The signal is also fed to gate IC210 in

the transmit data circuit to be transmitted when

applicable.

The DC restoration circuit formed by IC114A/B

and IC113A is similar to the receive data circuit

described in Section 4.7.1. It converts the data signal

from AC floating at half supply to DC levels of 0 and

5 volts that can be detected by the microprocessor.

Diodes D104 and D105 charge and discharge C158

andC157toestablishaDCreferenceonpin2of

comparator IC113A that is the average of the positive

and negative going alternations. Q106 turns on in the

transmit mode which grounds pin 2 and disables this

circuit.

In the transmit mode, gate IC210 selects either

the SMARTNET data signal or the Call Guard data

signal. It is controlled by the same SN_TR signal that

controls IC110. The output signal on pin 1 is then

applied to potentiometer 1 in IC209. Refer to Section

4.7.2 for more information on this circuit.

5-1 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

BATTERY PACK AND CHARGER INFORMATION

SECTION 5 BATTERY PACK AND CHARGER INFORMATION

5.1 BATTERY PACK

CAUTION

Dispose of these batteries in accordance with local reg-

ulations. Do notdispose in a land fill. Do not incinerate

because an explosion may result.

5.1.1 GENERAL

Standard 1400 mAH Battery Pack, Part Number

587-8150-135, contains six size AA nickel metal-

hydride (Ni-MH) batteries connected in series. Also

inside the pack are a diode, thermistor, and thermal

circuit breaker. The diode protects against reverse

polarity when charging and also prevents discharge of

the battery through the charger. The thermistor is used

by the rapid charger to sense battery temperature.

Intrinsically Safe 1400 mAH Battery Pack, Part

Number 587-8150-136, is similar to the standard pack

except that it has a thermal fuse and series resistors

connected to the negative terminal of the battery. This

resistor limits current if a short circuit occurs.

The battery pack is a sealed unit that is not

intended to be serviced. If the pack fails to hold a

charge or is defective for some other reason, it must be

replaced with a new unit. The batteries in this pack

have a nominal capacity of 1400 mAH. Typical oper-

atingtimebeforerechargeisasfollows.Thisassumes

that the transceiver is in the standby mode (receive,

audio squelched) 90% of the time, the receive mode

(receive, rated audio out) 5% of the time, and the

transmit mode 5% of the time.

5.1.2 BATTERY CARE

With proper care, a battery pack should provide

many months of service. Some causes of shortened

battery life are as follows:

•Repeated deep discharge. Recharging should take

place soon after the low battery indication appears.

This indication appears when the battery pack

voltage drops to 6.3 volts which is approximately

1 volt per cell. Do not regularly continue operating

the transceiver until it is completely nonfunctional.

•Regularly recharging a battery after only light use.

This may result in shortened operating time. If this

has caused shortened operating time, it may be

possible to restore it to normal by performing three

complete discharge/charge cycles.

•Frequent use at temperature extremes. Maximum

battery life is achieved if the ambient temperature

when using or recharging a battery is 68-86° F (20-

30° C). The recommended temperature ranges for

the various battery functions are as follows.

•Regularly leaving fully charged battery packs in the

charger for extended periods (such as longer than

over a weekend).

•A short circuit condition that causes overheating

that could vent hydrogen and reduce life.

5.2 RAPID CHARGER

The single-unit rapid charger that is used to

charge this battery pack is listed in Table 1-1. Also

required is either the 117 or 220 VAC power supply.

The pack can be charged while attached to the trans-

ceiver; however, charge time may be slightly longer.

Typical charge time is as follows. This assumes that

the battery is discharged to the point where the low

battery indication appears.

Typical Battery Charge Time = 1 hour

This charger uses state-of-the-art ∆T/∆t (change

in temperature/change in time) and – ∆V (negative

Power Setting Operating Time

1 watt 8.6 hours

3 watts 7.5 hours

Function Fahrenheit Celsius

Charging +50 to +104° +10 to +40°

Actual Use +14 to +140° –10 to +60°

Storage –22 to +122° –30 to +50°

BATTERY PACK AND CHARGER INFORMATION

5-2

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

change in voltage) sensing to determine when the

battery is nearly fully charged. This type of sensing

prolongs battery pack life because overcharging is

minimized.

Operation is in the fast charge mode until the

battery pack is approximately 95% charged. Charging

is then in the slow mode until the pack is removed

from the charger. With these battery packs, the fast

rate is approximately 1400 mA and the slow rate is

approximately 70 mA.

When the battery is inserted in the charger, the

red charge indicator turns on continuously to indicate

that charging in the fast mode is occurring. If this indi-

cator flashes at a slow rate when the pack is inserted, it

indicates that charging is occurring at the slow rate

because battery parameters are not within the required

range. The battery temperature must be within +50 to

+104° F (+10 to +40° C) and the battery voltage must

be above 6 volts for rapid charging to occur. When

these parameters reach the normal range, the charger

automatically switches to the fast rate.

The primary method used by these chargers to

detect a fully charged battery is to sense the point at

which the battery temperature begins increasing at a

faster rate (∆T/∆t). This normally provides the first

indication that the battery is fully charged. If this

method does not indicate a charged battery, the charger

also detects a negative change in battery voltage

(minus ∆V) which also indicates a fully charged

battery.

To provide fail-safe operation, the charger also

switches to the slow rate if the battery temperature

rises above approximately 113° F or total charge time

in the fast mode exceeds approximately 1.5 hours.

When the battery is fully charged, the charge

indicator begins flashing at a rapid rate and the slow

charge rate is selected. The charger then remains in

this mode until the battery is removed from the

charger.

6-1 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE AND PERFORMANCE TESTS

SECTION 6 ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE AND PERFORMANCE TESTS

6.1 GENERAL

6.1.1 INTRODUCTION

The alignment procedure described in this section

should be performed if repairs are made that could

affect the factory alignment. In addition, before a

transceiver is initially placed in service, the perfor-

mance tests in Sections 6.8 and 6.9 should be

performed.

To perform the alignment described in this

section, special PCTune software (see Table 1-1) and

the same basic computer setup used for programming

is required. This equipment is shown above and also

described in Section 3.1. Only Remote Programming

Interface (RPI), Part No. 023-9800-000, can be used

because it is the only RPI that has microphone and

speaker audio jacks that are required for alignment.

Only two adjustments are made manually and the

others are made digitally using the PCTune software.

The two manual adjustments are squelch sensitivity

and TCXO frequency, and if they do not need to be

reset, the transceiver can be tuned without removing

the cover.

This transceiver does not have a special test mode

that is selected. The PCTune software automatically

selects the frequencies and other test conditions that

are required to perform the alignment. If the trans-

ceiver must be controlled manually to perform such

things as testing or troubleshooting, program tempo-

rary conventional channels.

6.1.2 TEST SETUP

Connect the test setup shown in Figure 6-1. Addi-

tional information follows on equipment in this setup.

Figure 6-1 Alignment Setup Diagram

Remote Programming Interface (RPI)

Signal Generator/ Wattmeter

50-ohm

Load

Comm. Monitor

Generator

Audio

PC-Compatible

Computer

Speaker Load

Part No. 023-9800-000 RPI-Transceiver Cable

Part No. 597-2002-123

680-Ohm

ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE AND PERFORMANCE TESTS

6-2

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

$QWHQQD-DFN$GDSWHU7KHWUDQVFHLYHUDQWHQQDMDFN

LVDQ60$IHPDOHW\SH7KHUHIRUHVRPHVRUWRIDGDSWHU

PD\EHUHTXLUHGWRFRQQHFWWHVWHTXLSPHQWWRWKLVMDFN

$Q60$PDOHWR%1&IHPDOHDGDSWHULVDYDLODEOHE\

RUGHULQJ3DUW1R

5)6LJQDO*HQHUDWRU:KHQFRQQHFWLQJWKHJHQHU

DWRUWRWKHDQWHQQDMDFNXVHDWOHDVWDG%SDG

EHWZHHQWKHJHQHUDWRUDQGWUDQVFHLYHU7KLVSURWHFWV

WKHJHQHUDWRULIWKHWUDQVPLWWHULVDFFLGHQWDOO\NH\HG

DQGDOVRHQVXUHVWKDWDRKPORDGH[LVWV7KHLQSXW

OHYHOVOLVWHGLQWKH3&7XQHVFUHHQVDUHDWWKHDQWHQQD

MDFNVRLQFUHDVHWKHJHQHUDWRURXWSXWDFFRUGLQJO\

3RZHU6RXUFH,IDEDWWHU\LVXVHGWRSURYLGHWUDQV

FHLYHUSRZHUGXULQJDOLJQPHQWPDNHVXUHLWLVLQJRRG

FRQGLWLRQDQGIXOO\FKDUJHG3RZHURXWSXWOHYHOVDUH

ZLWKYROWVDSSOLHGWRWKHWUDQVFHLYHU7\SLFDO

FXUUHQWZKHQWUDQVPLWWLQJDWKLJKSRZHULV$

:DWWPHWHU/RDG7KHZDWWPHWHUDQGGXPP\ORDG

PXVWPHDVXUHDQGGLVVLSDWHXSWRDSSUR[LPDWHO\

ZDWWV)RUDFFXUDWHSRZHURXWSXWPHDVXUHPHQWDW

0+]XVHDPLQLPXPQXPEHURIFRQQHFWRUVZLWKD

7HIORQRUEHWWHUGLHOHFWULF,IFRD[LDOFDEOHLVXVHGLW

VKRXOGEHDPLQLPXPOHQJWKRIDORZORVVW\SH

$XGLR*HQHUDWRU7KHDXGLRJHQHUDWRULVFRQQHFWHG

WRWKHODUJHU´PRQRSKRQHMDFNRIWKH53,VKRZQ

EHORZ

6SHDNHU/RDG7KHVSHDNHUORDGLVFRQQHFWHGWRWKH

VPDOOHU´PRQRSKRQHMDFNRIWKH53,DVVKRZQ

DERYH7KLVLVDORZOHYHODXGLRRXWSXWWKDWUHTXLUHVD

ORDGRIDSSUR[LPDWHO\RKPV

&RPSXWHUDQG53,7KH53,LVFRQQHFWHGWRWKH

FRPSXWHUDQGWUDQVFHLYHUDVGHVFULEHGLQ6HFWLRQ

1RWHWKDW53,3DUW1RPXVWEH

XVHG2WKHU53,¶VGRQRWKDYHWKHMDFNVUHTXLUHGWR

LQMHFWPLFDXGLRDQGPRQLWRUVSHDNHUDXGLRZLWKD

FRPSXWHUFRQQHFWHGWRWKHDFFHVVRU\MDFN

6.1.3 TUNE SOFTWARE

*HQHUDO

7KH3&7XQHVRIWZDUHLVD:LQGRZVEDVHG

SURJUDP0LQLPXPVRIWZDUHDQGKDUGZDUHUHTXLUH

PHQWVDUHDVIROORZV

•:LQGRZV

•';RUIDVWHUPLFURSURFHVVRU

•PHJDE\WHVRI5$0

•PHJDE\WHVIUHHVSDFHDYDLODEOHRQKDUGGULYH

•$QDYDLODEOHVHULDOSRUW

6RIWZDUH,QVWDOODWLRQ

3URFHHGDVIROORZVWRLQVWDOOWKLVVRIWZDUH

 &ORVHDOODSSOLFDWLRQVWKDWDUHFXUUHQWO\UXQQLQJ

RWKHUWKDQ:LQGRZV

 ,QVHUWWKHGLVNFRQWDLQLQJWKH3&7XQHVRIWZDUHLQ

GULYH$RU%

 )URPWKH:LQGRZVWDVNEDUFKRRVH581DQG

RSHQ6(783(;(RQGULYH$RU%$OWHUQDWLYHO\

XVH)LOH([SORUHUDQGGRXEOHFOLFN6(783(;(

 )ROORZWKHLQVWUXFWLRQVRQWKHVFUHHQ7KHSURJUDP

LVDXWRPDWLFDOO\ORDGHGRQWKHKDUGGULYHDQGVWDUW

XSVKRUWFXWVRUJURXSVDUHFUHDWHG

6WDUWLQJ3&7XQH

6HOHFW6WDUWLQWKHWDVNEDUWKHQ3URJUDPV!

3&7XQH!3&7XQH

([LWLQJ3&7XQH

&OLFNWKH3&7XQHORJRRQWKHOHIWHQGRIWKHWLWOH

EDUDQGVHOHFW³&ORVH´RUFOLFNWKH³;´EXWWRQRQWKH

ULJKWHQGRIWKHWLWOHEDU

Speaker Audio

Out Jack

Mic Audio In

Jack

2.6 mm/3/32”

Phone Jack

3.6 mm/1/8”

Phone Jack

ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE AND PERFORMANCE TESTS

6-3 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

Figure 6-2 PCTune Main Screen

6.1.4 PRELIMINARY SETUP

1. With transceiver power turned off, connect the RPI

to an unused serial port of the computer. Then

connect the RPI to the accessory jack of the trans-

ceiver using the cable indicated in Figure 6-1.

2. Start the PCTune program as described in the

preceding section and click the “Serial Port” button

near the top to display the selected serial port.

Change to the port being used if necessary.

3. Turn transceiver power on and the green indicator

on the RPI should light. Move the slide switch to the

other position if this indicator is amber.

6.1.5 MAIN PCTUNE SCREEN

ThemainPCTunescreenisshowninFigure6-2

above. The various adjustments that are performed are

show in the six boxes in the lower part of this screen.

To perform just one adjustment or perform the adjust-

ments individually, click the “Tune” button for the

applicable adjustment. To perform a complete align-

ment and have the program automatically step through

all adjustments, click the “Complete Tune” button on

the top. The functions of the various buttons in this

screen are as follows:

Read Tune Settings Button - Reads and displays the

various tune settings currently stored in the radio.

Complete Tune Button - Initiates the complete tuning

procedure as just described.

Program Defaults Button - Programs the transceiver

with the default settings for the various adjustments.

Thiscanbeusedtoquicklyrestorearadiototypical

settings.

Serial Port Button - Selects the serial port that is used

to connect the RPI to the computer. This setting only

needs to be made the first time the program is run or if

a different serial port is used.

Tune Buttons - These buttons are used to perform

individual adjustments without having to go through

the complete alignment procedure (see paragraph at

the beginning of this section).

EF Johnson Logo Button - Clicking this button

displays the PCTune version number.

ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE AND PERFORMANCE TESTS

6-4

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

Figure 6-3 Connecting DC Power

6.1.6 REMOVING TRANSCEIVER COVER

NOTE: The transceiver cover needs to be removed

only if the frequency and squelch adjustments

described in Sections 6.2.1 and 6.6 need to be reset.

The frequency and squelch noise level adjust-

ments are made by manually resetting controls on the

RF board. To access these controls, proceed as

follows:

1. Remove the battery, belt clip, and back cover as

described in Section 1.11.

2. An external power supply must then be connected to

the transceiver as shown in Figure 6-3.

6.2 TRANSMIT FREQUENCY AND POWER

6.2.1 FREQUENCY ADJUSTMENT

Frequency adjustment should be performed with

the ambient temperature near the TCXO calibration

reference of 77° F (25° C). This ensures that the

frequency will be within tolerance at the temperature

extremes. Proceed as follows:

NOTE: The transmitter immediately keys when the

following function is selected. To turn the transmitter

on and off, click the “Toggle” button (see screen

which follows).

1. Connect a wattmeter and dummy load to the antenna

jack as shown in Figure 6-1.

2. Click the “Complete Tune” button to automatically

go from one adjustment to the next or click the

“Tune” button in the “Tx Power” box to perform

only this adjustment.

3. Monitor the transmit frequency with a communica-

tions monitor set to the frequency displayed on the

screen.

4. At room temperature, this frequency should be

within ±400 Hz. If readjustment is required, remove

the cover as described in Section 6.1.6 and adjust

R73 (see Figure 6-3) for the correct frequency. This

also adjusts the receive frequency.

Transmit Power Adjustment Screen

6.2.2 POWER OUTPUT ADJUSTMENT

Set the high and low power output by clicking the

arrows or moving the button in the scroll bar. The rela-

tive power level is indicated by the number in the box.

Set the high and low power levels as follows:

High Power Level = 3.0 watts

Low Power Level =1.0watt

6.3 MODULATION BALANCE

1. If manually selecting each test, click the “Tune”

button in the “Modulation Balance” box. Otherwise,

this function is selected automatically when the

“Complete Tune” button is clicked.

2. View the transmit modulation waveform on the CRT

of a communication monitor. If applicable, set the

monitor for de-emphasis off, high-pass filter off,

low-pass filter 3 kHz, and FM peak detection active.

7.5 VDC

Power Supply

(–) Neg

(+) Pos

R73

(Freq Adj)

R13

(Sq Lvl Adj)

ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE AND PERFORMANCE TESTS

6-5 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

3. Follow the instructions on the screen and adjust for

the best demodulated square wave with minimum

tilt and overshoot.

6.4 AUDIO DEVIATION

1. If manually selecting each test, click the “Tune”

button in the “Audio Deviation” box. Otherwise,

this function is selected automatically when the

“Complete Tune” button is clicked.

2. Inject a 1 kHz signal at the level indicated on the

screen into the Mic Audio jack of the RPI (see

Section 6.1.2).

3. Monitor the transmit modulation signal with a

communication monitor and follow the instructions

on the screen to adjust the wideband, narrow band,

and NPSPAC (see Section 1.2.5) deviation.

6.5 DATA DEVIATION

1. If manually selecting each test, click the “Tune”

button in the “Data Deviation” box. Otherwise, this

function is selected automatically when the

“Complete Tune” button is clicked.

2. Monitor the transmit modulation signal with a

communication monitor and follow the instructions

on the screen to adjust the wideband, narrow band,

and SMARTNET/SmartZone control channel

data deviation.

6.6 SQUELCH ADJUST

The input level to the noise squelch circuit is set

by R13 on the IF board, and the squelch threshold

level is set by the PCTune software. The factory

setting of R13 should not need to be changed, so step 3

which follows can normally be skipped. Proceed as

follows to set the squelch:

1. If manually selecting each test, click the “Tune”

button in the “Squelch” box. Otherwise, this func-

tion is selected automatically when the “Complete

Tune” button is clicked.

2. Connect an RF signal generator to the antenna jack

using a 6 dB or greater pad. Set the generator for the

channel frequency and modulation indicated on the

screen.

3. If R13 must be adjusted (see preceding), remove the

transceiver cover and connect power as described in

Section 6.1.6. Temporarily set the squelch for “50”

on the “Squelch” screen and adjust R13 (see Figure

6-3) so that the squelch just opens (audio is heard) at

8-9 dB SINAD.

4. Readjust the squelch level as indicated on the screen

so that the squelch opens and closes between the

indicated SINAD levels.

6.7 RSSI ADJUST

NOTE: Improperly setting the RSSI levels can result in

degraded SmartZone roaming operation. Therefore,

do not change the default settings unless you are

familiar with how roaming will be affected.

The function which adjusts the RSSI levels is

available only by clicking the “Tune” button in the

“RSSI” box. It is not displayed in the Complete Tune

mode for the reason just described. The default values

that are programmed by clicking the “Program

Defaults” button (see Section 6.1.5) should not be

changed unless you are familiar with how these levels

control site switching in a SmartZone system.

ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE AND PERFORMANCE TESTS

6-6

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

PERFORMANCE TESTS

6.8 RECEIVER PERFORMANCE TESTS

6.8.1 PRELIMINARY SETUP

This transceiver does not have a special test mode

that can be selected to perform testing. Therefore,

temporary conventional channels are programmed to

perform this function. Program channels near the low,

middle, and high ends of the band (wideband, narrow

band or both) and with and without Call Guard

(CTCSS/DCS) squelch as applicable. In addition, to

check high and low power and talk-around operation,

program High/Low Power and Repeater Talk-Around

option switches. Proceed as follows to check receiver

operation:

1. Select the channel near the center of the band

(around 860 MHz).

2. Connect the signal generator to the antenna jack (see

Section 6.1.2 for more information). Set the output

to the channel frequency, modulated with 1 kHz at 3

kHz (wideband channels) or 1.5 kHz deviation

(narrow band channels).

6.8.2 SINAD SENSITIVITY

NOTE: The audio output level of the accessory con-

nector is at a lower level than at the internal speaker.

In addition, the internal speaker automatically mutes

when a load of approximately 1k ohm or less is con-

nected to this output.

1. Connect a SINAD meter to the speaker output of the

RPI (see Section 6.1.2).

2. Decrease the signal generator output to obtain a 12

dB reading on the SINAD meter. The signal gener-

ator output should be 0.35 µV maximum. If

required, temporarily readjust squelch for “0” as

described in Section 6.6. (after clicking “Read Tune

Settings” to note the current setting).

3. Check both wide and narrow band channels if appli-

cable, and also check the channels on each end of

the band. Reset the squelch to the previous level if it

was changed.

6.8.3 SQUELCH SENSITIVITY

With the test setup used for the preceding test,

slowly increase the signal generator output until the

squelch just opens (audio is enabled). Then decrease

the signal generator output until it just closes. The

squelch should open after 12 dB SINAD and close

before 6 dB SINAD.

6.8.4 AUDIO POWER AND DISTORTION

CAUTION

Grounding either speaker terminal may damage the

audio amplifier. Therefore, make sure that any meter

connected across the speaker has floating inputs.

To measure audio output power, the actual level

across the speaker must be measured because full

output power is not available at the accessory

connector. If a load of approximately 1k ohm or less is

connected to the speaker output of the accessory

connector, it must be disconnected to enable the

internal speaker. Proceed as follows:

1. Remove the transceiver cover and connect power as

described in Section 6.1.6. Carefully turn the front

cover over to access the speaker.

2. Connect an AC voltmeter and distortion meter

across the speaker (make sure they have floating

inputs). Alternatively, 100 µF, non-polarized capac-

itors can be used in series with the leads.

3. Set the signal generator output for –60 dBm (220

µV). Minimum audio power should be 0.5 watt

across the 16-ohm speaker (2.8 V rms). Distortion

should be less than 5% at 0.5 watt.

6.8.5 RECEIVER CURRENT DRAIN

Maximum transceiver current with 0.5-watt audio

output is 300 mA. With the receiver squelched, it

should be 92 mA maximum.

ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE AND PERFORMANCE TESTS

6-7 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

6.9 TRANSMITTER PERFORMANCE TESTS

6.9.1 POWER OUTPUT

Refer to Section 6.8.1 for information on test

channels. Proceed as follows:

1. Connect a wattmeter and dummy load to the antenna

jack as described in Section 6.1.2.

2. Key the transmitter and high power output should be

2.8-3.5 watts. Check channels on both ends of the

band.

3. Select the talk-around mode by pressing the Talk-

Around option switch. The talk-around mode is

indicated by in the display. Key the transmitter

and power output should be 2.5 watts or greater.

Check channels on both ends of the band.

4. Select the low power mode by pressing the High/

Low Power option switch. Low power is indicated

by “LOW” in the lower part of the display. Power

output should be 0.8-1.2 watt in the standard mode

and 0.7-1.2 watt in the talk-around mode.

6.9.2 TRANSMIT FREQUENCY

Monitor the transmit frequency with a communi-

cation monitor set to the channel frequency. At room

temperature, the frequency should be within ± 400 Hz.

This also checks the receive frequency.

6.9.3 TRANSMIT MODULATION

1. Select a channel not programmed for Call Guard

(CTCSS/DCS) squelch and monitor the transmit

signal with a communication monitor. Speak into

the microphone with a normal voice and modulation

should be approximately 3.4 kHz (wideband) or 1.4

kHz (narrow band).

2. Select a channel programmed for Call Guard

squelch and with no voice or other microphone

input signal, data deviation should be 1.0 kHz

(wideband) or 0.8 kHz (narrow band) ± 200 Hz.

3. Speak into the microphone with the channel

programmed for Call Guard squelch selected.

Maximum total audio and Call Guard deviation

should be 4.7 kHz (wideband) or 2.3 kHz (narrow

band).

6.9.4 TRANSMITTER CURRENT DRAIN

Maximum current drain in the transmit mode

should be as follows:

High Power, Standard Mode - 1.75 A

High Power, Talk-Around Mode - 2.0 A

Low Power, both modes - 1.3 A

ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE AND PERFORMANCE TESTS

6-8

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

This page intentionally left blank.

7-1 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

PARTS LIST

SECTION 7 PARTS LIST

RefNo. Description PartNo.

CHASSIS PARTS

EP 01 B-3826B #1125-3A (chassis flex) 022-3906-001

EP 02 B-3827C #1125-3B (PTT sw flex) 022-3907-001

F 1 MCA-3 (CCV-3A) fuse 022-3907-037

J 1 3A3-M10 antenna connector 022-3906-124

MP 01 1125 metal chassis-2 022-3906-196

MP 02 1125 top plastic panel (b)-2 022-3907-057

MP 03 1591 top rubber sheet 022-3906-276

MP 04 Screw, 0-1 fh m2x4.5 ni b 022-3907-068

MP 05 VR nut (E) 022-3906-222

MP 06 VR nut (F) 022-3906-223

MP 07 VR nut (I) 022-3906-224

MP 08 1125 top seal 022-3906-271

MP 10 Knob N230 (large) 022-3907-067

MP 12 Knob N231 (small) 022-3907-066

MP 13 1125 accessory jack cover 022-3906-204

MP 16 Screw m2x4.5 zk 022-3906-211

MP 17 Screw B 4 022-3906-212

MP 18 1591 rear plastic panel-1 022-3907-056

MP 22 1591 contact base 022-3906-245

MP 23 1125 battery release button-1 022-3906-228

MP 24 1125 battery release spring-1 022-3906-232

MP 25 1125 plus terminal(A)-1 022-3906-236

MP 26 1591 plus plate 022-3906-246

MP 27 1125 fuse plate 022-3906-237

MP 28 1591 contact pin 022-3906-234

MP 29 Spring (F) rubber contact 022-3906-225

MP 30 1125 minus plate 022-3906-235

MP 32 Screw ph b0 2x4 sus 022-3906-221

MP 33 Screw ph m2x6 sus 022-3906-218

MP 34 Screw ph m2x9 sus 022-3906-219

MP 35 Screw ph m2x23 sus zk 022-3906-220

MP 36 Screw ph 0 m2 x3.5 ni 022-3906-215

MP 37 Screw 1 m2x4.5 zk for RF PA 022-3906-211

MP 39 Screw ph 0 m2 x3.5 ni 022-3906-215

MP 43 Screw ph b0 2x4 sus 022-3906-221

MP 45 Screw ph m2x2.5 zk 022-3906-216

MP 46 1591 RF shield-2 022-3907-063

MP 47 Round stut (G) 022-3906-275

MP 49 1591 antenna jack plate 022-3907-073

MP 50 Himerio-sheet (X) 022-3906-268

MP 52 FCC serial No. sticker (AZ)-1 022-3907-061

MP 59 Insulation plate (BI) 022-3907-071

MP 60 2176 earth plate 022-3907-076

MP 61 Thermal sheet (I) 022-3907-075

MP 62 Rubber sheet (L) 022-3907-072

MP 63 Sponge (cp) srcn 022-3906-269

MP 64 Sponge (BJ) 022-3907-070

JACK ASSEMBLY

J 01 YM-260 accessory jack 022-3906-125

EP 01 B-3829C (#1125-3A) flex circuit 022-3906-003

MP 01 1125 jack panel-1 022-3906-198

MP 02 1125 jack rubber (A)-1 022-3906-238

MP 03 1125 jack plate 022-3906-233

MP 04 Screw ph m2x2.5 zk 022-3906-216

MP 05 1591 jack sheet 022-3906-279

DISPLAY ASSEMBLY

C 1 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 2 680P C1608 B 022-3906-355

C 3 C1608 JB 1C 473K-T-A 022-3906-080

C 4 C1608 JB 1C 104KT-N 022-3906-614

C 5 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 6 C1608 JB 1C 104KT-N 022-3906-614

C 7 C1608 JB 1C 104KT-N 022-3906-614

DS 1 LNG310M6URA LED 022-3906-637

DS 2 LNG310M6URA LED 022-3906-637

DS 3 SEC1601C LED 022-3906-101

DS 4 SEC1401C 022-3906-100

DS 5 SEC 1801C LED 022-3906-102

DS 6 LD-BU10394J 022-3907-036

DS 7 LNG310M6URA LED 022-3906-637

DS 8 LNG310M6URA LED 022-3906-637

EP 1 B-5186A #2176-2D display PC bd

10-key 022-3907-006

B-5186A #2176-3D display PC bd

3-key 022-3907-086

EP 2 SRCN-1125-SG 022-3906-240

EP 3 LCD reflector plate 022-3907-048

Ref No. Description Part No.

PARTS LIST

7-2

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

IC 1 LC75834W 022-3907-015

J 1 52204-2990 022-3906-128

J 2 AXN820735 022-3906-132

MP 01 10-key front panel (plastic) 022-3907-058

3-key front panel (plastic) 022-3907-087

MP 04 10-key rubber keypad 022-3907-077

3-key rubber keypad 022-3907-089

MP 06 1125 sp rubber-1 (10-key) 022-3906-270

1121 mic seal-1 (3-key) 022-3907-090

MP 07 1125 LCD holder 022-3906-227

MP 08 1591 front plate-1 022-3907-059

MP 09 Screw ph no.0b01.4x4.5ni 022-3906-266

MP 10 Screw ph b0 #.0-3 m1.4x3.5 blk 022-3906-214

MP 11 1125 front seal 022-3906-239

MP 12 Screw b0 2x4 ni (bt) 022-3906-213

MP 15 1125 display plate (10-key) 022-3906-243

1591 display plate (3-key) 022-3907-088

MP 16 Sponge (cp) srcn 022-3906-269

Q 1 2SA1576 S transistor 022-3906-029

Q 2 2SA1576 S transistor 022-3906-029

Q 3 2SA1576 S transistor 022-3906-029

Q 4 2SA1576 S transistor 022-3906-029

R 01 ERJ3GEYJ 103V resistor 022-3906-163

R 02 EFJ3GEYJ 151 V resistor 022-3906-145

R 03 ERJ3GEYJ 332 V resistor 022-3906-159

R 07 NTCCM16084LH 473KC resistor 022-3907-053

R 08 ERJ3GEYJ 473 V resistor 022-3906-171

R 09 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 11 ERJ3GEYJ 473 V resistor 022-3906-171

R 12 ERJ3GEYJ 102 V resistor 022-3906-154

R 13 ERJ3GEYJ 473 V resistor 022-3906-171

R 14 ERJ3GEYJ 102 V resistor 022-3906-154

R 15 ERJ3GEYJ 473 V resistor 022-3906-171

R 16 ERJ3GEYJ821V resistor 022-3906-153

R 17 EFJ3GEYJ 151 V resistor 022-3906-145

R 18 12K ERJ3GE resistor 022-3906-164

Ref No. Description Part No.

3-KEY ASSEMBLY

EP 1 B-5188B #2176-3D (3-key PC bd) 022-3907-091

C 1 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 2 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 3 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 4 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 5 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

DS 1 LN1371G-(TR) display/LED 022-3906-098

DS 2 LN1371G-(TR) display/LED 022-3906-098

DS 3 LN1371G-(TR) display/LED 022-3906-098

DS 4 LN1371G-(TR) display/LED 022-3906-098

J 1 AXN720535 022-3906-131

MC 1 EM-123H microphone 022-3906-195

Q 1 2SA1576 S transistor 022-3906-029

R 1 ERJ3GEYJ 333 V resistor 022-3906-169

R 2 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 3 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 4 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 5 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 6 ERJ3GEYJ 221 V resistor 022-3906-288

R 8 ERJ3GEYJ 103V resistor 022-3906-163

R 10 ERJ3GEYJ 121V resistor 022-3906-144

R 11 ERJ3GEYJ 121V resistor 022-3906-144

R 12 ERJ3GEYJ 103V resistor 022-3906-163

SP 1 EAS3P127J speaker 022-3906-058

W 1 ERDS2T0 resistor to spkr 022-3906-877

W 2 ERDS2T0 resistor to spkr 022-3906-877

W 3 OPC-677 022-3907-069

W 4 OPC-677 022-3907-069

10-KEY ASSEMBLY

EP 1 B-5187C #2176-2D (10-key PC bd) 022-3907-007

C 1 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 2 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 3 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 4 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

Ref No. Description Part No.

DISPLAY ASSEMBLY

PARTS LIST

7-3 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

C 5 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

DS 1 LN1371G-(TR) display/LED 022-3906-098

DS 2 LN1371G-(TR) display/LED 022-3906-098

DS 3 LN1371G-(TR) display/LED 022-3906-098

DS 4 LN1371G-(TR) display/LED 022-3906-098

J 1 AXN720535 022-3906-131

MC 1 EM-123H microphone 022-3906-195

Q 1 2SA1576 S transistor 022-3906-029

R 1 ERJ3GEYJ 333 V resistor 022-3906-169

R 2 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 3 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 4 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 5 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 10 ERJ3GEYJ 121V resistor 022-3906-144

R 11 ERJ3GEYJ 121V resistor 022-3906-144

R 12 ERJ3GEYJ 103V resistor 022-3906-163

SP 1 EAS3P127J speaker 022-3906-058

W 1 ERDS2T0 resistor to spkr 022-3906-877

W 2 ERDS2T0 resistor to spkr 022-3906-877

W 3 OPC-677 022-3907-069

W 4 OPC-677 022-3907-069

IF ASSEMBLY

C 01 4.7 16V MSVA 022-3906-097

C 02 C1068 JB 1H 102K-T-A 022-3906-060

C 03 C1608 JB 1C 473K-T-A 022-3906-080

C 04 TEMSVA 1A 106M-8L 022-3906-096

C 05 C1068 JB 1H 102K-T-A 022-3906-060

C 06 TEMSVA 1A 106M-8L 022-3906-096

C 07 TEMSVA 1A 106M-8L 022-3906-096

C 08 C1608 JB 1C 104KT-N 022-3906-614

C 09 C1608 JB 1E 103KTA 022-3906-063

C 10 C1608 CH 1H 180J-T-A 022-3906-068

C 11 C1608 JB 1E 103KTA 022-3906-063

C 12 C1608 JB 1E 103KTA 022-3906-063

C 13 C1608 JB 1E 103KTA 022-3906-063

C 14 C1608 JB 1E 103KTA 022-3906-063

C 15 4.7 16V MSVA 022-3906-097

C 16 C1068 JB 1H 102K-T-A 022-3906-060

RefNo. Description PartNo.

C 17 C1608 CH 1H 680J-T-A diode 022-3906-798

C 18 C1608 JB 1C 104KT-N 022-3906-614

C 19 C1068 JB 1H 102K-T-A 022-3906-060

C 20 C1608 CH 1H 221J-T-A 022-3906-603

C 21 C1608 CH 1H 221J-T-A 022-3906-603

C 23 C1068 JB 1H 102K-T-A 022-3906-060

C 24 C1068 JB 1H 102K-T-A 022-3906-060

C 25 C1068 JB 1H 102K-T-A 022-3906-060

C 26 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 29 C1608 JB 1C 104KT-N 022-3906-614

C 30 C1608 JB 1E 103KTA 022-3906-063

C 31 C1608 JB 1C 104KT-N 022-3906-614

C 32 820P C1608 B 022-3906-083

C 33 C1608 JB 1C 473K-T-A 022-3906-080

C 34 C1068 JB 1H 102K-T-A 022-3906-060

C 35 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

D 2 MA8056 M diode 022-3906-049

D 3 MA2S728-(TX) diode 022-3907-026

EP 1 B-5183C (#2176-1C) 022-3907-003

IC 1 TK11350BM 022-3907-020

IC 2 TK11360BM 022-3907-019

IC 3 TA31136FN8(EL) IC 022-3907-008

L 2 ELJNC R56J 0.56U 022-3906-122

Q 1 2SC4081 T107 S transistor 022-3906-031

Q 2 2SK882 GR (TE85L) transistor 022-3906-515

Q 3 DTC144EE TL transistor 022-3906-329

Q 4 UMG2N TL diode 022-3906-250

R 02 ERJ3GEYJ 472 V resistor 022-3906-160

R 04 ERJ3GEUJ 560V resistor 022-3906-142

R 05 ERJ3GEYJ 181 V resistor 022-3906-146

R 07 ERJ3GEYJ 222 V resistor 022-3906-157

R 08 ERJ3GEYJ 272 V resistor 022-3906-158

R 09 ERJ3GEYJ 331 V resistor 022-3906-389

R 12 ERJ3GEYJ 682 V resistor 022-3906-162

R 13 RV-222 (RH03AVAS4J 47K) 022-3906-516

R 14 NTCCM16084LH 104KC 022-3907-052

R 15 ERJ3GEYJ 473 V resistor 022-3906-171

R 16 ERJ3GEYJ 101 V resistor 022-3906-143

R 17 330K ERJ3GE resistor 022-3906-180

R 18 ERJ3GEYJ 102 V resistor 022-3906-154

R 19 ERJ3GEYJ 474 V resistor 022-3906-181

R 20 ERJ3GEYJ 103V resistor 022-3906-163

Ref No. Description Part No.

10-KEY ASSEMBLY IF ASSEMBLY

PARTS LIST

7-4

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

R 21 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 22 ERJ3GEYJ 331 V resistor 022-3906-389

R 23 ERJ3GEYJ 152 V resistor 022-3906-155

R 24 ERJ3GEYJ 122 V resistor 022-3906-390

R 25 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 26 NTCCM16084BH 222KC 022-3907-055

R 27 ERJ3GEYJ 222 V resistor 022-3906-157

R 28 ERJ3GEYJ 682 V resistor 022-3906-162

X 1 CDBCA450CX24 resistor 022-3906-642

PLL ASSEMBLY

EP 1 B-5184C (#2176-1C) 022-3907-004

C 01 TEMSVA 1A 106M-8L 022-3906-096

C 02 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 04 C1608 JB 1C 104KT-N 022-3906-614

C 05 1.5 16V SVA 022-3906-094

C 07 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 08 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 09 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 10 C1068 JB 1H 102K-T-A 022-3906-060

C 11 C1608 CH 1H 150J-T-A 022-3906-067

C 12 C1608 JB 1C 473K-T-A 022-3906-080

C 13 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 14 C1608 JB 1C 473K-T-A 022-3906-080

C 15 C1608 CH 1H 180J-T-A 022-3906-068

C 16 12P C1608 CH 022-3906-066

C 17 C1608 JB 1C 104KT-N 022-3906-614

IC 1 MB15A02PFV-1 022-3907-016

IC 2 TC7S66FU IC 022-3906-020

L 1 MLF1608A 2R2K-T coil 022-3906-514

Q 1 2SA1576 S transistor 022-3906-029

Q 2 2SC4081 T107 S transistor 022-3906-031

Q 3 DTC144EE TL transistor 022-3906-329

R 01 ERJ3GEYJ 562 V resistor 022-3906-161

R 10 ERJ3GEYJ 103V resistor 022-3906-163

R 12 ERJ3GEYJ 472 V resistor 022-3906-160

R 13 ERJ3GEYJ 182 V resistor 022-3906-156

R 14 ERJ3GEYJ 471 V resistor 022-3906-150

R 15 ERJ3GEYJ 682 V resistor 022-3906-162

R 16 270 ERJ3GE resistor 022-3906-147

R 02 NTCCM16084BH 222KC 022-3907-055

Ref No. Description Part No.

R 03 ERJ3GEYJ 101 V resistor 022-3906-143

R 04 ERJ3GEYJ 332 V resistor 022-3906-159

R 05 NTCCM16084BH 152KC 022-3907-054

R 06 EFJ3GEYJ 151 V resistor 022-3906-145

R 07 ERJ3GEYJ 101 V resistor 022-3906-143

R 08 ERJ3GEYJ 122 V resistor 022-3906-390

R 09 ERJ3GEYJ 272 V resistor 022-3906-158

Ref No. Description Part No.

RF UNIT

C 001 C1608 CH 1H 0R3B-T-A 022-3906-468

C 002 C1608 CH 1H 040B-T-A 022-3906-609

C 004 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 005 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 007 C1608 CH 1H 030B-T-A 022-3906-489

C 008 C1608 JB 1C 473K-T-A 022-3906-080

C 009 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 010 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 011 C1608 CH 1H 010B-T-A 022-3906-085

C 012 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 013 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 014 C1608 JB 1E 103KTA 022-3906-063

C 015 C1608 CH 1H 180J-T-A 022-3906-068

C 016 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 017 C1608 JB 1E 103KTA 022-3906-063

C 018 C1608 JB 1E 103KTA 022-3906-063

C 019 C1608 CH 1H 040B-T-A 022-3906-609

C 020 C1608 JB 1E 103KTA 022-3906-063

C 022 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 023 C1608 CH 3R-5B-T-A 022-3906-353

C 024 C1608 CH 3R-5B-T-A 022-3906-353

C 025 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 026 12P C1608 CH 022-3906-066

C 027 C1608 JB 1C 104KT-N 022-3906-614

C 028 C1608 JB 1C 104KT-N 022-3906-614

C 029 C1608 JB 1C 104KT-N 022-3906-614

C 030 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 031 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 032 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 033 C1608 CH 1H 050C-T-A 022-3906-064

C 034 C1608 JB 1H 471K-T-A 022-3906-059

Ref No. Description Part No.

IF ASSEMBLY

PARTS LIST

7-5 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

C 035 C1608 CH 1H 040B-T-A 022-3906-609

C 036 C1608 CH 1H 150J-T-A 022-3906-067

C 037 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 038 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 040 C1608 JB 1C 473K-T-A 022-3906-080

C 041 C1608 JB 1H 471K-T-A 022-3906-059

C 042 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 043 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 044 C1608 JB 1H 471K-T-A 022-3906-059

C 045 C1608 JB 1C 104KT-N 022-3906-614

C 046 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 047 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 048 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 049 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 050 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 052 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 053 4.7 16V MSVA 022-3906-097

C 054 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 055 C1608 CH 1H 180J-T-A 022-3906-068

C 057 4.7 16V MSVA 022-3906-097

C 058 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 059 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 060 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 062 C1608 CH 1H 050C-T-A 022-3906-064

C 063 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 064 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 065 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 066 C1608 CH 1H 2R5B-T-A 022-3906-071

C 067 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 068 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 069 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 070 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 071 C1608 JB 1H 471K-T-A 022-3906-059

C 072 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 073 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 074 C1608 JB 1C 473K-T-A 022-3906-080

C 075 C1608 CH 1H 020B-T-A 022-3906-086

C 076 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 077 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 078 C1608 CH 1H 050C-T-A 022-3906-064

C 079 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 080 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 081 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 082 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 083 C1608 CH 1H 1R5B-T-A 022-3906-087

Ref No. Description Part No.

C 084 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 085 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 088 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 089 C1608 JB 1C 104KT-N 022-3906-614

C 090 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 091 C1608 JB 1C 473K-T-A 022-3906-080

C 093 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 094 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 095 C1608 JB 1C 104KT-N 022-3906-614

C 096 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 097 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 098 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 100 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 101 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 102 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 103 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 104 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 105 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 106 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 107 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 108 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 109 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 111 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 112 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 114 C1608 JB 1C 473K-T-A 022-3906-080

C 117 C1608 CH 1H 070D T-A 022-3906-596

C 119 C1608 JB 1C 473K-T-A 022-3906-080

C 120 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 121 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 122 1 C2012 10V B 022-3907-034

C 124 C1608 JB 1C 104KT-N 022-3906-614

C 125 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 126 0.5P C1608 CH 0.1P 022-3906-084

C 127 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 128 C1608 JB 1E 103KTA 022-3906-063

C 129 C1608 JB 1E 103KTA 022-3906-063

C 130 C1608 JB 1E 103KTA 022-3906-063

C 131 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 132 C1608 CH 1H 050C-T-A 022-3906-064

C 133 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 134 C1608 CH 1H 030B-T-A 022-3906-489

C 135 C1608 JB 1E 103KTA 022-3906-063

C 136 C1608 CH 1H 150J-T-A 022-3906-067

C 137 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 138 C1608 CH 1H 150J-T-A 022-3906-067

Ref No. Description Part No.

RF UNIT

PARTS LIST

7-6

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

C 139 C1608 JB 1C 104KT-N 022-3906-614

C 140 0.5P C1608 CH 0.1P 022-3906-084

D 01 MA77 (TW) diode 022-3906-047

D 02 MA77 (TW) diode 022-3906-047

D 03 UM9401F diode 022-3906-937

D 04 HSM88AS-TR diode 022-3906-046

D 05 HSM88AS-TR diode 022-3906-046

D 06 MA2S111-(TX) diode 022-3906-050

D 07 MA78 022-3906-044

D 09 MA2S111-(TX) diode 022-3906-050

D 10 MA2S111-(TX) diode 022-3906-050

D 11 UM9401F diode 022-3906-937

D 13 MA2S077-(TX) diode 022-3907-027

D 14 MA2S077-(TX) diode 022-3907-027

D 15 MA2S077-(TX) diode 022-3907-027

D 16 MA2S077-(TX) diode 022-3907-027

EP 1 B-5182C (#2176-1C) 022-3907-002

FI 1 EZF-U860 AM81T filter 022-3906-055

FI 2 EZF-U860 BM81T filter 022-3906-056

FI 3 FL-295 022-3907-028

FI 4 SFPC450E-TC01 filter 022-3907-030

FI 5 CFUM450F 022-3907-031

FI 6 SFPC450G-TC01 ceramic 022-3907-029

FI 7 GLP802-2 filter 022-3906-505

IC 1 M67706/SC1140 IC 022-3901-337

IC 2 NJM2904V-TE1 IC 022-3906-016

IC 3 NVCO-SM-838 S.IC 022-3906-135

IC 4 TC75S54F 022-3907-013

J 1 AXK6S30645P 022-3907-046

L 02 LQN1A 8N8J04 8.8N coil 022-3906-109

L 05 ELJRE 10NJ 10N coil 022-3906-493

L 06 ELJRE 18NJ 18N coil 022-3906-959

L 07 ELJRE 68NG-F coil 022-3906-671

L 08 ELJRE 39NJ 39N coil 022-3906-953

L 09 ELJNC R47K 0.47U coil 022-3907-041

L 1 LQN1A 8N8J04 8.8N coil 022-3906-109

L 10 ELJNC R18K 0.18U coil 022-3906-956

Ref No. Description Part No.

L 11 ELJRE 33NJ 33N coil 022-3907-043

L 12 ELJRE 10NJ 10N coil 022-3906-493

L 13 DCS3220-09 coil 022-3906-121

L 14 ELJRE 39NJ 39N coil 022-3906-953

L 15 ELJRE 8N2J 8.2N coil 022-3906-491

L 16 MLF1608A 1R0M-T coil 022-3906-110

L 17 ELJRE 6N8J 6.8N coil 022-3906-496

L 19 ELJRE 12NJ 12N coil 022-3906-497

L 20 ELJRE 12NJ 12N coil 022-3906-497

L 22 ELJRE 15NJ 15N coil 022-3906-668

L 23 MLF1608A 1R0M-T coil 022-3906-110

L 24 BLM21P300S 022-3907-044

L 25 BLM21P300S 022-3907-044

L 26 BLM21P300S 022-3907-044

L 27 MLF1608D R33K 0.33U 022-3907-040

L 28 MLF1608D R33K 0.33U 022-3907-040

L 29 ELJRE 3N9J 3.9N coil 022-3907-042

L 30 MLF1608A 2R2K-T coil 022-3906-514

L 32 ELJRE 10NJ 10N coil 022-3906-493

L 33 ELJRE 8N2J 8.2N coil 022-3906-491

L 34 DCS3220-09 coil 022-3906-121

MP 03 1591 module T-shield (under IC1) 022-3906-262

MP 04 1781 module plate (VCO-IC1) 022-3906-508

MP 05 2176 shield plate (over Q2) 022-3907-065

MP 06 2176 shield sheet (over FI2) 022-3907-074

MP 07 1591 VCO shield case-1 022-3906-509

MP 08 1591 VCO sheet (shield insulator) 022-3906-281

MP 09 Grand spring (E) 022-3906-510

MP 10 1591 VCO shield cover plate-1 022-3906-298

Q 01 2SC5015 022-3906-035

Q 02 3SK177 U72 022-3906-037

Q 05 2SC4081 T107 S transistor 022-3906-031

Q 06 2SB1132 T100 Q transistor 022-3906-030

Q 07 UMD3 TL diode 022-3906-040

Q 08 2SC3357-T2 RF transistor 022-3907-022

Q 09 2SC3357-T2 RF transistor 022-3907-022

Q 10 2SC4228-T2 R44 transistor 022-3906-033

Q 11 2SC4228-T2 R44 transistor 022-3906-033

Q 12 2SC4228-T2 R44 transistor 022-3906-033

Q 13 2SA1576 S transistor 022-3906-029

Q 14 XP4601(TX) transistor 022-3906-328

Q 16 2SA1577 T107 Q transistor 022-3906-249

Q 17 DTC144EE TL transistor 022-3906-329

Ref No. Description Part No.

RF UNIT

PARTS LIST

7-7 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

Q 18 2SC4215-Y transistor 022-3906-320

Q 19 DTA144EE transistor 022-3907-024

Q 20 DTA144EE transistor 022-3907-024

Q 21 DTC144EE TL transistor 022-3906-329

R 001 DRJ3GEYJ 561 V resistor 022-3906-151

R 002 ERJ3GEYJ 472 V resistor 022-3906-160

R 003 ERJ3GEYJ 182 V resistor 022-3906-156

R 004 56K ERJ3GE resistor 022-3906-172

R 005 ERJ3GEYJ 333 V resistor 022-3906-169

R 006 ERJ3GEUJ 560V resistor 022-3906-142

R 007 ERJ3GEYJ 181 V resistor 022-3906-146

R 009 270 ERJ3GE resistor 022-3906-147

R 010 18 ERJ3GE resistor 022-3906-140

R 011 270 ERJ3GE resistor 022-3906-147

R 012 ERJ3GEYJ 102 V resistor 022-3906-154

R 020 82 MCR10 resistor 022-3907-049

R 021 ERJ3GEYJ 102 V resistor 022-3906-154

R 022 ERJ3GEYJ 102 V resistor 022-3906-154

R 023 ERJ3GEYJ 103V resistor 022-3906-163

R 024 ERJ3GEYJ 473 V resistor 022-3906-171

R 025 ERJ3GEYJ 103V resistor 022-3906-163

R 026 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 027 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 028 56K ERJ3GE resistor 022-3906-172

R 029 ERJ3GEYJ 333 V resistor 022-3906-169

R 030 ERJ3GEYJ 182 V resistor 022-3906-156

R 031 ERJ3GEYJ 332 V resistor 022-3906-159

R 032 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 033 ERJ3GEYJ 273 V resistor 022-3906-168

R 034 ERJ3GEYJ 103V resistor 022-3906-163

R 035 ERJ3GEYJ 224V resistor 022-3906-178

R 036 ERJ3GEYJ 221 V resistor 022-3906-288

R 037 ERJ3GEYJ 101 V resistor 022-3906-143

R 039 ERJ3GEYJ 473 V resistor 022-3906-171

R 041 ERJ3GEYJ 471 V resistor 022-3906-150

R 042 ERJ3GEYJ 100V 10 OHM resistor 022-3906-138

R 043 ERJ3GEYJ 471 V resistor 022-3906-150

R 044 ERJ3GEYJ 220V resistor 022-3906-685

R 045 ERJ3GEYJ 272 V resistor 022-3906-158

R 046 ERJ3GEYJ 100V 10 ohm resistor 022-3906-138

R 047 15 ERJ3GE resistor 022-3906-139

R 048 ERJ3GEYJ 472 V resistor 022-3906-160

R 049 ERJ3GEYJ 122 V resistor 022-3906-390

R 050 ERJ3GEYJ 472 V resistor 022-3906-160

Ref No. Description Part No.

R 051 ERJ3GEYJ 472 V resistor 022-3906-160

R 052 ERJ3GEUJ 560V resistor 022-3906-142

R 053 39K ERJ3GE resistor 022-3906-170

R 054 DRJ3GEYJ 561 V resistor 022-3906-151

R 055 ERJ3GEYJ 392 V resistor 022-3906-391

R 056 ERJ3GEYJ 222 V resistor 022-3906-157

R 057 15 ERJ3GE resistor 022-3906-139

R 058 15 ERJ3GE resistor 022-3906-139

R 059 15 ERJ3GE resistor 022-3906-139

R 060 270 ERJ3GE resistor 022-3906-147

R 061 18 ERJ3GE resistor 022-3906-140

R 062 270 ERJ3GE resistor 022-3906-147

R 063 ERJ3GEYJ821V resistor 022-3906-153

R 064 ERJ3GEYJ 682 V resistor 022-3906-162

R 065 ERJ3GEYJ 182 V resistor 022-3906-156

R 066 ERJ3GEUJ 560V resistor 022-3906-142

R 067 ERJ3GEYJ 473 V resistor 022-3906-171

R 068 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 069 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 072 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 073 EVM-1X B54 50K resistor 022-3907-051

R 074 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 075 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 076 ERJ3GEYJ 223 V resistor 022-3906-167

R 077 ERJ3GEYJ 103V resistor 022-3906-163

R 078 ERJ3GEYJ 222 V resistor 022-3906-157

R 079 ERJ3GEYJ 272 V resistor 022-3906-158

R 080 ERJ3GEYJ 332 V resistor 022-3906-159

R 082 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 083 ERJ3GEYJ 220V resistor 022-3906-685

R 085 ERJ3GEUJ 560V resistor 022-3906-142

R 086 ERJ3GEYJ 122 V resistor 022-3906-390

R 087 ERJ3GEYJ 474 V resistor 022-3906-181

R 091 12K ERJ3GE resistor 022-3906-164

R 092 ERJ3GEYJ 100V 10 OHM resistor 022-3906-138

R 093 15K ERJ3GE resistor 022-3906-165

R 094 ERJ3GEYJ 103V resistor 022-3906-163

R 095 ERJ3GEYJ 223 V resistor 022-3906-167

R 096 15K ERJ3GE resistor 022-3906-165

R 097 ERJ3GEYJ 102 V resistor 022-3906-154

R 098 ERJ3GEYJ 391 V resistor 022-3906-149

R 099 ERJ3GEYJ 471 V resistor 022-3906-150

R 101 ERJ3GEYJ 103V resistor 022-3906-163

R 102 ERJ3GEYJ 682 V resistor 022-3906-162

R 103 ERJ3GEYJ 272 V resistor 022-3906-158

Ref No. Description Part No.

RF UNIT

PARTS LIST

7-8

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

R 104 DRJ3GEYJ 561 V resistor 022-3906-151

W 1 IPS-1041-2 022-3906-133

W 3 ERJ3GE-JPW V resistor 022-3906-185

W 4 ERJ3GE-JPW V resistor 022-3906-185

W 5 ERJ3GE-JPW V resistor 022-3906-185

W 6 ERJ3GE-JPW V resistor 022-3906-185

X 3 CR-626 022-3907-038

Ref No. Description Part No.

LOGIC UNIT

C 001 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 002 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 003 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 004 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 005 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 006 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 007 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 008 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 009 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 010 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 011 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 012 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 013 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 014 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 015 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 016 C1608 JB 1E 103KTA 022-3906-063

C 017 C1608 JB 1E 103KTA 022-3906-063

C 018 C1608 JB 1E 103KTA 022-3906-063

C 019 C1608 JB 1E 103KTA 022-3906-063

C 020 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 021 C1608 JF 1C 104Z-T-A 022-3906-076

C 022 C1608 JB 1E 103KTA 022-3906-063

C 023 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 024 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 025 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 026 C1608 JB 1E 103KTA 022-3906-063

C 027 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 028 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 029 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

Ref No. Description Part No.

C 030 C1608 JB 1C 104KT-N 022-3906-614

C 031 C1608 JB 1C 104KT-N 022-3906-614

C 032 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 033 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 036 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 043 C1608 JF 1C 104Z-T-A 022-3906-076

C 044 C1608 JF 1C 104Z-T-A 022-3906-076

C 045 C1608 JF 1C 104Z-T-A 022-3906-076

C 046 1 C2012 10V B 022-3907-034

C 048 C1608 JF 1C 104Z-T-A 022-3906-076

C 049 C1608 JF 1C 104Z-T-A 022-3906-076

C 051 C1608 JF 1C 104Z-T-A 022-3906-076

C 052 C1608 JF 1C 104Z-T-A 022-3906-076

C 053 C1608 JF 1C 104Z-T-A 022-3906-076

C 054 C1608 JF 1C 104Z-T-A 022-3906-076

C 055 C1608 JB 1E 103KTA 022-3906-063

C 101 C1608 JB 1E 103KTA 022-3906-063

C 102 470P C1608 CH 022-3906-252

C 103 C1068 JB 1H 102K-T-A 022-3906-060

C 104 0.039 C1608 16V B 022-3907-033

C 105 C1608 JB 1E 103KTA 022-3906-063

C 106 C1608 JB 1E 103KTA 022-3906-063

C 107 1 C2012 10V B 022-3907-034

C 108 C1608 JB 1C 104KT-N 022-3906-614

C 109 C1608 JB 1E 103KTA 022-3906-063

C 110 C1608 JB 1C 473K-T-A 022-3906-080

C 111 4.7 C3216 6.3V B 022-3907-035

C 113 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 115 1 C2012 10V B 022-3907-034

C 116 C1608 JB 1C 473K-T-A 022-3906-080

C 118 C1608 JB 1C 104KT-N 022-3906-614

C 121 C1608 JB 1C 104KT-N 022-3906-614

C 122 C1608 JB 1C 104KT-N 022-3906-614

C 123 TEMSVB2 1A 336M-8R 022-3906-095

C 124 C1608 JB 1E 103KTA 022-3906-063

C 125 C1608 JB 1E 103KTA 022-3906-063

C 126 0.0033 C1608 B 022-3906-077

C 127 C1608 JB 1C 104KT-N 022-3906-614

C 128 C1608 JB 1H 222K-T-A 022-3906-061

C 129 4.7 10V MSVA 022-3906-361

C 130 1 C2012 10V B 022-3907-034

C 134 1 C2012 10V B 022-3907-034

C 136 C1608 JB 1C 104KT-N 022-3906-614

C 137 1 C2012 10V B 022-3907-034

C 138 4.7 10V MSVA 022-3906-361

Ref No. Description Part No.

RF UNIT LOGIC UNIT

PARTS LIST

7-9 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

C 139 1 C2012 10V B 022-3907-034

C 140 4.7 10V MSVA 022-3906-361

C 141 1 C2012 10V B 022-3907-034

C 142 C1608 JB 1E 103KTA 022-3906-063

C 143 1 C2012 10V B 022-3907-034

C 144 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 145 1 C2012 10V B 022-3907-034

C 150 0.0056 C1608 B 022-3906-607

C 151 0.015 C1608 16V B 022-3901-397

C 152 C1608 JB 1E 103KTA 022-3906-063

C 153 C1608 JB 1C 473K-T-A 022-3906-080

C 154 C1608 JB 1H 222K-T-A 022-3906-061

C 155 C1608 JB 1C 223K-T-A 022-3906-079

C 156 C1608 JB 1C 682K-T-A 022-3906-088

C 157 1 C2012 10V B 022-3907-034

C 158 1 C2012 10V B 022-3907-034

C 159 C1608 JB 1E 103KTA 022-3906-063

C 201 C1608 JB 1H 472K-T-A 022-3906-062

C 202 C1608 JB 1H 472K-T-A 022-3906-062

C 203 C1608 JB 1H 472K-T-A 022-3906-062

C 204 1 C2012 10V B 022-3907-034

C 205 C1608 JB 1H 472K-T-A 022-3906-062

C 206 C1608 JB 1C 104KT-N 022-3906-614

C 207 C1608 JB 1C 104KT-N 022-3906-614

C 208 C1608 JB 1C 473K-T-A 022-3906-080

C 209 1 C2012 10V B 022-3907-034

C 210 0.0033 C1608 B 022-3906-077

C 211 560P C1608 SL 022-3906-526

C 212 C1608 CH 1H 560J-T-A 022-3906-601

C 213 C1608 JB 1H 472K-T-A 022-3906-062

C 214 1 C2012 10V B 022-3907-034

C 215 C1608 JB 1E 103KTA 022-3906-063

C 216 C1608 JB 1E 103KTA 022-3906-063

C 217 0.0033 C1608 B 022-3906-077

C 218 C1608 JB 1H 222K-T-A 022-3906-061

C 219 C1608 JB 1C 104KT-N 022-3906-614

C 222 1 C2012 10V B 022-3907-034

C 223 1 C2012 10V B 022-3907-034

C 224 1 C2012 10V B 022-3907-034

C 225 C1608 JF 1C 104Z-T-A 022-3906-076

C 226 4.7 C3216 6.3V B 022-3907-035

C 227 1 C2012 10V B 022-3907-034

C 228 C1608 JB 1C 104KT-N 022-3906-614

C 229 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 301 C1608 JF 1C 104Z-T-A 022-3906-076

Ref No. Description Part No.

C 303 C1608 CH 1H 150J-T-A 022-3906-067

C 304 C1608 CH 1H 180J-T-A 022-3906-068

C 305 C1608 CH 1H 270J-T-A 022-3906-069

C 306 C1608 JF 1C 104Z-T-A 022-3906-076

C 307 C2012 JB 1C 224K-T-A 022-3906-082

C 308 C1608 JB 1C 473K-T-A 022-3906-080

C 401 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 402 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 403 1 C2012 10V B 022-3907-034

C 404 4.7 16V MSVA 022-3906-097

C 405 C1068 JB 1H 102K-T-A 022-3906-060

C 406 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 407 4.7 10V MSVA 022-3906-361

C 408 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 409 4.7 16V MSVA 022-3906-097

C 410 C1068 JB 1H 102K-T-A 022-3906-060

C 411 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 412 4.7 10V MSVA 022-3906-361

C 413 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 414 C2012 JB 1C 224K-T-A 022-3906-082

C 415 4.7 10V MSVA 022-3906-361

C 416 C1068 JB 1H 102K-T-A 022-3906-060

C 418 C1068 JB 1H 102K-T-A 022-3906-060

C 419 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 420 C1608 JB 1C 104KT-N 022-3906-614

C 421 C1608 JB 1C 104KT-N 022-3906-614

C 422 C1068 JB 1H 102K-T-A 022-3906-060

C 423 4.7 10V MSVA 022-3906-361

C 430 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 431 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 432 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 433 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 434 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 435 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 436 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 437 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 438 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 439 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 440 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 441 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 443 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 444 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 446 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 447 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 448 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

Ref No. Description Part No.

LOGIC UNIT

PARTS LIST

7-10

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

C 449 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 450 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 451 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 454 C1608 CH 1H 330J-T-A 022-3906-070

C 456 1 C2012 10V B 022-3907-034

D 101 MA2S111-(TX) diode 022-3906-050

D 102 MA2S111-(TX) diode 022-3906-050

D 103 MA2S111-(TX) diode 022-3906-050

D 104 MA2S111-(TX) diode 022-3906-050

D 105 MA2S111-(TX) diode 022-3906-050

D 301 MA2S077-(TX) diode 022-3907-027

D 302 MA2S111-(TX) diode 022-3906-050

D 305 MA8056 M diode 022-3906-049

D 306 MA8056 M diode 022-3906-049

D 307 MA8056 M diode 022-3906-049

D 308 MA8056 M diode 022-3906-049

D 309 MA2S111-(TX) diode 022-3906-050

D 310 MA2S111-(TX) diode 022-3906-050

D 311 MA8056 M diode 022-3906-049

D 312 MA8160 (TX) diode 022-3907-025

D 313 MA8056 M diode 022-3906-049

D 401 MA2S111-(TX) diode 022-3906-050

D 402 MA2S111-(TX) diode 022-3906-050

D 403 MA8039-L diode 022-3906-251

EP 1 B-5185D #2176-2D logic PC bd

(10-key) 022-3907-005

B-5185D #2176-3D logic PC bd

(3-key) 022-3907-085

EP 2 B-3828B (#1125-3A) flex circuit 022-3906-002

IC 101 MC33172D IC 022-3906-018

IC 102 MC33172D IC 022-3906-018

IC 103 TC7S66FU IC 022-3906-020

IC 104 TDA7233D IC 022-3906-530

IC 105 TDA7233D IC 022-3906-530

IC 106 TDA7233D IC 022-3906-530

IC 107 MC33172D IC 022-3906-018

IC 110 TC4W53FU (TE12L) IC 022-3907-010

IC 112 MC33172D IC 022-3906-018

IC 113 MC33172D IC 022-3906-018

IC 114 MC33172D IC 022-3906-018

IC 115 TC7S04FU IC 022-3907-011

IC 201 TC75S54F 022-3907-013

Ref No. Description Part No.

IC 202 NJM2904V-TE1 IC 022-3906-016

IC 203 TC4W53FU (TE12L) IC 022-3907-010

IC 204 TC4W66FU(TE12L) IC 022-3906-022

IC 205 NJM2904V-TE1 IC 022-3906-016

IC 206 MC33172D IC 022-3906-018

IC 208 MC33111D 022-3906-311

IC 209 AD8403ARU50 022-3907-014

IC 210 TC4W53FU (TE12L) IC 022-3907-010

IC 303 PCD3312CT IC 022-3906-024

IC 304 X25128SI-2.7T6 IC 022-3907-012

IC 305 S-80842ALNP-EA6 022-3907-009

IC 306 HD64F2144FA20 (FX-2176) 022-3907-017

IC 309 TC7W32FU (TE12L) IC 022-3906-531

IC 401 TK11250BM 022-3907-018

IC 402 TK11250BM 022-3907-018

IC 403 S-81230SG-QB-T1 IC 022-3906-532

J 1 AXK5S30245P 022-3907-047

J 2 52396-0990 022-3906-130

J 3 52207-0590 022-3906-129

J 4 AXK520145P 022-3907-045

MP 1 Ferrite sheet (C) next to IC306 022-3906-244

MP 3 2176 CPU shield 022-3907-064

Q 101 DTC144EE TL transistor 022-3906-329

Q 102 2SA1576 S transistor 022-3906-029

Q 103 DTC144EE TL transistor 022-3906-329

Q 104 DTC144EE TL transistor 022-3906-329

Q 105 DTC144EE TL transistor 022-3906-329

Q 106 2SB798-T2 DK transistor 022-3907-021

Q 107 2SC4081 T107 S transistor 022-3906-031

Q 108 DTC144EE TL transistor 022-3906-329

Q 109 DTC144EE TL transistor 022-3906-329

Q 110 UMG2N TL diode 022-3906-250

Q 111 DTC144EE TL transistor 022-3906-329

Q 112 UMG2N TL diode 022-3906-250

Q 201 DTC144EE TL transistor 022-3906-329

Q 301 2SC4081 T107 S transistor 022-3906-031

Q 302 DTC144EE TL transistor 022-3906-329

Q 401 2SC4081 T107 S transistor 022-3906-031

Q 402 2SJ316-TD diode 022-3906-041

Q 403 2SJ316-TD diode 022-3906-041

Q 404 UMD6 TL diode 022-3907-023

Q 405 UMD6 TL diode 022-3907-023

Ref No. Description Part No.

LOGIC UNIT

PARTS LIST

7-11 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

Q 406 UMD6 TL diode 022-3907-023

R 101 ERJ3GEYJ 154V resistor 022-3906-392

R 102 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 103 ERJ3GEYJ 473 V resistor 022-3906-171

R 104 ERJ3GEYJ 473 V resistor 022-3906-171

R 105 ERJ3GEYJ 124 V resistor 022-3906-176

R 106 ERJ3GEYJ 394V resistor 022-3901-500

R 107 ERJ3GEYJ 273 V resistor 022-3906-168

R 108 560K ERJ3GE resistor 022-3906-393

R 109 ERJ3GEYJ 562 V resistor 022-3906-161

R 110 ERJ3GEYJ 154V resistor 022-3906-392

R 111 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 112 ERJ3GEYJ 103V resistor 022-3906-163

R 113 ERJ3GEYJ 473 V resistor 022-3906-171

R 116 560K ERJ3GE resistor 022-3906-393

R 117 RV-283 (RK0971111) resistor 022-3906-189

R 118 ERJ3GEYJ 682 V resistor 022-3906-162

R 119 ERJ3GEYJ 682 V resistor 022-3906-162

R 120 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 124 ERJ3GEYJ 103V resistor 022-3906-163

R 125 ERJ3GEYJ 102 V resistor 022-3906-154

R 127 2.7 MCR10 022-3906-136

R 131 2.7 MCR10 022-3906-136

R 132 2.7 MCR10 022-3906-136

R 133 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 134 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 135 ERJ3GEYJ 473 V resistor 022-3906-171

R 136 ERJ3GEYJ 473 V resistor 022-3906-171

R 137 330K ERJ3GE resistor 022-3906-180

R 139 560K ERJ3GE resistor 022-3906-393

R 140 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 141 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 142 ERJ3GEYJ 103V resistor 022-3906-163

R 143 ERJ3GEYJ 183 V resistor 022-3906-166

R 145 ERJ3GEYJ 103V resistor 022-3906-163

R 146 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 147 ERJ3GEYJ 222 V resistor 022-3906-157

R 148 ERJ3GEYJ 122 V resistor 022-3906-390

R 149 ERJ3GEYJ 103V resistor 022-3906-163

R 150 ERJ3GEYJ 102V resistor 022-3906-154

R 151 ERJ3GEYJ 102V resistor 022-3906-154

R 152 ERJ3GEYJ 103V resistor 022-3906-163

R 153 ERJ3GEYJ 333V resistor 022-3906-169

R 154 ERJ3GEYJ 332V resistor 022-3906-159

Ref No. Description Part No.

R 155 ERJ3GEYJ 203V resistor 022-3906-528

R 156 ERJ3GEYJ 223V resistor 022-3906-167

R 157 ERJ3GEYJ 202V resistor 569-0155-202

R 158 ERJ3GEYJ 153V resistor 022-3906-165

R 159 ERJ3GEYJ 223V resistor 022-3906-167

R 160 15K ERJ3GE resistor 022-3906-165

R 161 ERJ3GEYJ 333 V resistor 022-3906-169

R 162 ERJ3GEYJ 333 V resistor 022-3906-169

R 163 ERJ3GEYJ 222 V resistor 022-3906-157

R 164 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 165 ERJ3GEYJ 473 V resistor 022-3906-171

R 166 ERJ3GEYJ 562 V resistor 022-3906-161

R 167 56K ERJ3GE resistor 022-3906-172

R 168 ERJ3GEYJ 272 V resistor 022-3906-158

R 169 ERJ3GEYJ 473 V resistor 022-3906-171

R 201 39K ERJ3GE resistor 022-3906-170

R 202 39K ERJ3GE resistor 022-3906-170

R 203 ERJ3GEYJ 272 V resistor 022-3906-158

R 204 ERJ3GEYJ 473 V resistor 022-3906-171

R 205 ERJ3GEYJ 224V resistor 022-3906-178

R 206 ERJ3GEYJ 272 V resistor 022-3906-158

R 207 ERJ3GEYJ 333 V resistor 022-3906-169

R 208 56K ERJ3GE resistor 022-3906-172

R 210 ERJ3GEYJ 474 V resistor 022-3906-181

R 211 ERJ3GEYJ 562 V resistor 022-3906-161

R 212 1.2M ERJ3GE resistor 022-3906-856

R 213 ERJ3GEYJ 105 V resistor 022-3906-184

R 214 ERJ3GEYJ 102 V resistor 022-3906-154

R 215 ERJ3GEYJ821V resistor 022-3906-153

R 216 ERJ3GEYJ 474 V resistor 022-3906-181

R 220 39K ERJ3GE resistor 022-3906-170

R 221 ERJ3GEYJ 823 V resistor 022-3906-174

R 222 ERJ3GEYJ 332 V resistor 022-3906-159

R 223 ERJ3GEYJ 683V resistor 022-3906-173

R 224 ERJ3GEYJ 154V resistor 022-3906-392

R 225 ERJ3GEYJ 562 V resistor 022-3906-161

R 226 ERJ3GEYJ 103V resistor 022-3906-163

R 227 ERJ3GEYJ 103V resistor 022-3906-163

R 228 ERJ3GEYJ 472 V resistor 022-3906-160

R 231 ERJ3GEYJ 273 V resistor 022-3906-168

R 232 ERJ3GEYJ 273 V resistor 022-3906-168

R 235 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 236 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 237 ERJ3GEYJ 473 V resistor 022-3906-171

R 238 ERJ3GEYJ 473 V resistor 022-3906-171

Ref No. Description Part No.

LOGIC UNIT

PARTS LIST

7-12

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

R 239 330K ERJ3GE resistor 022-3906-180

R 240 ERJ3GEYJ 103V resistor 022-3906-163

R 241 ERJ3GEYJ 683V resistor 022-3906-173

R 243 ERJ3GEYJ 103V resistor 022-3906-163

R 244 ERJ3GEYJ 103V resistor 022-3906-163

R 245 ERJ3GEYJ 331 V resistor 022-3906-389

R 246 ERJ3GEYJ 182 V resistor 022-3906-156

R 247 ERJ3GEYJ 102 V resistor 022-3906-154

R 248 ERJ3GEYJ 103V resistor 022-3906-163

R 249 ERJ3GEYJ 103V resistor 022-3906-163

R 250 ERJ3GEYJ 682 V resistor 022-3906-162

R 251 12K ERJ3GE resistor 022-3906-164

R 252 ERJ3GEYJ 103V resistor 022-3906-163

R 253 ERJ3GEYJ 222 V resistor 022-3906-157

R 254 ERJ3GEYJ 154V resistor 022-3906-392

R 301 ERJ3GEYJ 474 V resistor 022-3906-181

R 302 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 303 ERJ3GEYJ 183 V resistor 022-3906-166

R 304 12K ERJ3GE resistor 022-3906-164

R 306 ERJ3GEYJ 102 V resistor 022-3906-154

R 308 ERJ3GEYJ 103V resistor 022-3906-163

R 309 ERJ3GEYJ 103V resistor 022-3906-163

R 310 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 311 ERJ3GEYJ 102 V resistor 022-3906-154

R 312 ERJ3GEYJ 103V resistor 022-3906-163

R 313 ERJ3GEYJ 474 V resistor 022-3906-181

R 314 ERJ3GEYJ 224V resistor 022-3906-178

R 315 ERJ3GEYJ 224V resistor 022-3906-178

R 316 ERJ3GEYJ 471 V resistor 022-3906-150

R 317 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 318 ERJ3GEYJ 471 V resistor 022-3906-150

R 319 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 320 ERJ3GEYJ 471 V resistor 022-3906-150

R 321 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 322 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 323 ERJ3GEYJ 471 V resistor 022-3906-150

Ref No. Description Part No.

R 324 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 325 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 326 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 328 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 329 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 330 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 331 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 332 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 333 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 335 ERJ3GEYJ 471 V resistor 022-3906-150

R 336 ERJ3GEYJ 102 V resistor 022-3906-154

R 337 ERJ3GEYJ 471 V resistor 022-3906-150

R 338 ERJ3GEYJ 223 V resistor 022-3906-167

R 339 ERJ3GEYJ 333 V resistor 022-3906-169

R 401 ERJ3GEYJ 183 V resistor 022-3906-166

R 402 ERJ3GEYJ 103V resistor 022-3906-163

R 403 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 404 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 406 200K ERJ3GE 022-3907-050

R 407 ERJ3GEYJ 104 V resistor 022-3906-175

R 408 ERJ3GEYJ 102 V resistor 022-3906-154

S 1 EC10SP16-51 switch 022-3906-057

W 10 ERJ3GE-JPW V resistor 022-3906-185

W 11 ERJ3GE-JPW V resistor 022-3906-185

W 4 ERJ3GE-JPW V resistor 022-3906-185

W 5 ERJ3GE-JPW V resistor 022-3906-185

W 6 ERJ3GE-JPW V resistor 022-3906-185

W 7 ERJ3GE-JPW V resistor 022-3906-185

W 8 ERJ3GE-JPW V resistor 022-3906-185

W 9 ERJ3GE-JPW V resistor 022-3906-185

X 1 CR-563 crystal 022-3906-542

X 2 CR-635 022-3907-039

Ref No. Description Part No.

LOGIC UNIT

PARTS LIST

7-13 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

FCN

MP18

MP35

MP25

ENT

CLR

PARTS LIST

7-14

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

ENT

Display Board

EP3

(Display) EP2

(Display)

DS6

(Display)

MP7

(Display)

MP4

(Display)

MP10 (4)

(Display)

Display Board

MP8

(Display)

MP12 (4)

Display)

MP9 (4)

(Display)

MP15

(Display)

SP1

(10-Key)

MP6

(Display)

MC1

(10-Key)

MP11

(Display)

MP1

(Display)

10-Key Board

MP16

(Display)

MP15

(Display)

MP10 (2)

(Display)

MC1

(3-Key Bd)

SP1

(3-key Bd)

MP11

(Display)

MP1

(Display)

MP4

(Display)

3-Key

Board

MP6

(Display)

10-KEY FRONT PANEL

3-KEY FRONT PANEL

PARTS LIST

7-15 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

MP12

MP5

MP3

EP1

(Jack Assy)

MP4 (2)

(Jack Assy)

MP13

(Chassis) MP17

(Chassis)

J1/MP5

(Jack Assy)

MP16 (2)

(Chassis)

MP1

(Jack Assy)

MP2

(Jack Assy)

MP3

(Jack Assy)

EP2

(Logic Assy)

EP1

(Logic Board)

MP46

MP45

MP8

MP7

MP2

MP6

MP10

MP36 (4)

MP50

(Pad)

MP37 (2) EP1

(RF Board) MP4 (2)

(Chassis)

MP49 MP1

EP1

(Chassis)

MP39 (4)

EP2

(Chassis)

MP47 (4)

MP3

(RF Unit)

PARTS LIST

7-16

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

F1 MP33

MP27

MP28

MP29

MP34

MP22

MP26

MP30

MP18

MP24

MP23

MP32

MP34

MP27

MP32

MP52

(Sticker)

8-1 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND COMPONENT LAYOUTS

SECTION 8 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND COMPONENT LAYOUTS

HC2

C17

HR1

C16

R13

R15

R12

HR2

C15

FIN

GND

PLLSK

PLLSO

PLLST

GND

RF5V

GND

PLL BOARD TOP VIEW

IC2 Q3

IC1

R16

HC1

C10 C12

GND

C14

C13 L1

C11

R10

C8 C7

CPV R14

PLL BOARD BOTTOM VIEW

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND COMPONENT LAYOUTS

8-2

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

C6 C4

C10

C25

C9 C13

C14

HR1

C35

C18

C23

R21

R16 R15

R14

HC1

R22

C30

C33

R24

R28R29

R27

C11

C12

R19

C20

C21 R17

R18

C29

GND

RF5C

RF5V

CPV

VCOV

VCC

IC3

C15

Q3 X1 C24

C26

R23

R13

R20 C8

C3 C31

C2 HC2

IC1 IC2 D2

C19 HW1

C16

C17

W/N

FIOUT

GND

C32

IF5V

FIIN

R5V

GND

IFIN

GND

XTAL

RSSI

NOISE

DET

SQLC

R12 R26

R25

IF BOARD TOP VIEW

IF BOARD BOTTOM VIEW

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

8-3 TRANSCEIVER BLOCK DIAGRAM

Rx Freq

Minus

45.225 MHz

First

Mixer

FI2 FI3 Q2

IF Amp

DET

RSSI

D13/

D14

Wide/Narrow

Band

Switch

Wide/Narrow

Band

Switch

Ceramic

Bandpass

Filter

Ceramic

Bandpass

Filter

Ceramic

Bandpass

Filter

FI6

FI5

Bandpass

Filter

Noise

Detector

Comparator

FI4 D15/

D16

RF Amp

Bandpas

Filter Bandpass

Filter

45.225 MHz

Bandpass

Filter

W/N

IF BOARD

RECEIVER

TRANSMITTER

SYNTHESIZER

PLL BOARD

RF UNIT

LOGIC UNIT

10-KEY OR 3-KEY

BOARD

DISPLAY

BOARD

SWITCH BOARD

ASSEMBLY

IC1 Q8 Q9 D7

Q5, Q6

Q7, D1,

D3, D11

FI7

L34,

L13,

Antenna Reverse

Power

Detector

Forward

Power

Detector

Low Pass

Filter

Antenna

Switch

Power

Control

Power

Amp Driver Predriver Tx/Rx Switch

16-Ohm

Speaker

SP1

SPE

IC306

Microcomputer

Microphone

MC1

W/N

RSSI

NOISE

RXDATA

SN RX

TXDATA

IC305,

RESET

XTAL

EXTAL 9.8304 MHz

Q106,

Q107

Audio Amp

AMUT

LVCC

IC105,

IC106

Audio Amp

IC104

EXT Terminal

(Accessory Connector)

DS6

LC Display

IC1

Display

Controller

Keyboard

PTT Sw

PTTIN

PLLST

DTMF SO

DTMF CK

Mic Mute Gate

IC204B

IC303

DTMF

Encoder

IC304

16K x 8

EEPROM

MSCK, MSO,

MSI, DPO TST Key S0-S3

Key R0-R3

QSEL 0-3

Channel Sw

ULOCK

R117

Volume

Control

Mute

Gate

IC103

Expander

IC208

1/2

Bandpass

Filter

IC101

Restoration

IC107

Data

Low Pass Filter

IC102

Q104

Data

Mute Gate

Q103

Bandwidth

Control

IC113A,

IC114

DC Restoration

IC112,

IC113B

Data

Low Pass Filter

Q108

Data

Mute Gate

Q201

BWC

Bandwidth

Control

IC206

A/B

Data

LP Filter

Test

Switch

IC203

IC210

Data Switch

Low Pass Filter

< 3 kHz

IC205 IC202B

Limiter High Pass Filter

> 300 Hz

IC202A

FI1 Q1

Q18

X3 Multiplier

14.925 MHz

TCXO

IC4

Driver

Amp

Ref Freq

Set

R73

Second Mixer/Detector

Q12

Buffer

IC1 Synthesizer Chip

Phase

Detector

Reference

Counter

6.25

kHz

6.25

kHz

Prescaler

Div By

128/129

Counter

Charge

Pump

Q1, Q2 IC3

VCO Buffer

Q10, Q11

Q13

Lock

Detect

PWR (Power Control)

LTR(Modulation Balance)

MOD (Modulation) IC201

Combiner

Digital Pot

T5V

DTMF

Mute

IC204A

IC208

1/2

Compressor

+5S

IC403

+3V Regulator

IC2

IC1

RF 5V

Regulator

VCO V Reg

CP V Reg

R13

Squelch

Level

Adjust

BWC

TXDATA

Smartnet

T/R Switch

IC110

T5V

Wide/Narrow Band Select

Noise

VCC

RECEIVE AUDIO PROCESSING

RECEIVE DATA PROCESSING

TRANSMIT DATA PROCESSING

TRANSMIT AUDIO PROCESSING

SMARTNET DATA PROCESSING

IC209

+5V

Audio

44.775 MHz Second Injection

450 kHz Second IF

SMARTNET

Data

Q406

+5S Regulator

Q405

T5V Regulator

Q404

R5V Regulator

R5V

T5V

+5V

+5L

VCC

+5V Regulator

IC402

L5V Regulator

IC401

R5C

T5C

S5C

Power Supplies

+5V Q403

Q402

LVCC Switch

VCC Switch

LVCC To

Audio Amps

7.5V

Battery

BAT

Power

On-Off Sw

BAT To PA IC1,

Pwr Ctrl Circuit

IC3

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500 8-4

IC1

FI7

HC6

C140

R77

D10

FI4

FI5

FI6

Q18

C104

IC3

HC15

FI1

FI2

C49 R39 C50

C55

HC20

C122 C47

C40

R30

R29

R31 C42

R28

C41

R27

C54

C97 R75 R76

R74

R72

C96

R73

Q14

L33

L26

L25 C52

HC12

C91

IC4

C95

C94 L30

C133

C134

C132

L28

C128

R87

C131

C130

R86

C129

L27

RF5V

RF5C

GND

VCC

VCOV

R41

R42

R43

C119

C60

C88

CPV

C53

R36 C48

R37

C137

MIC

JACK

HC1

C103

C84

R66

C102

C101

C100

R68

R67

C83

C107

Q12

FIN

GND

PLLSK

PLLSO

PLLST

LOCKUP

GND

RF5V

GND

C136

C98

L23

Q13

Q11

C93

R45

C65

R44 R46

C75

Q10

C106

C105

R101

FI3

C126

R98

HC7

D13 R92

C29

R102

HC2

HC5

C27

R91

D15 R96

L13

L34

C35

C34

R21

C36

R22

R25

C38

C37

R23

C33

R83

C63

C58

R82 C62

L15

L24

Q16

R80

HC17

HC14

C43

R24

C44

R32

R33

C57

HC13

HW2

R63

R64 C89

C85

C64

L16

C90

R59

R58

R65

C81

L22

C82

R62

R61

HC10

PWR

TMUT

T5V

LTR

MOD

+5V

LOCKUP

ULOCK

GND

BATT

R5V

DET

NOISE

RSSI

W/N

PLLST

PLLSO

PLLSK

RF5C

GND

VCC

GND

C108

C109

HC16

HC18

C139

C26 C76

R53

C78

C77

R54

L20

R56

R60 R57

C80

R55

R85

C127

C79

L19

R97

R51

C10

R69 C68

C67

C71

C70

R47

C69

R48

L29

R79

C22

C24

C74

C114

C73

R52

R50

C66

L17

C121

C120

R49

C124

Q17

C72

L12

C23

R12

HC8

C28 D14

R94

C135

R93

R103

L10

C15

C18

R99

C19

R78

C117

C25

C20

C17

C16

C12

R11

R10

L11

C13

C14

C11

C125

C59

HR1

C138

L32

D16

R95

HC3

Q20

Q21

Q19

R104

L14

C31

R20

IC2

R26

R35

C46

C111

C32

C45

R34

HC9

D11

C30

W/N

FIOUT

GND

IF5V

FIIN

R5V

GND

IFIN

R5V

GND

INFIN

GND

XTAL

RSSI

NOISE

DET

C112

TO PLL BOARD

TO IF BOARD

TO LOGIC BOARD

RF BOARD TOP VIEWRF BOARD BOTTOM VIEW

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

PWR ADJUST

0.047

C119

33P

C60

PWR

TMUT

T5V

BATT

MOD

LTR

33P

C102

33P

C101

33P

C100

33P

C93

HC1

+5V

PWR

PLLSK

ULOCK

PLLST

LTR

BATT

PLLSO

MOD

T5V

TMUT

33P

C107

33P

C106

33P

C105

33P

C104

33P

C112

SQLC

AXK6S30645P

16 15

HC10

RF5C

VCC

PLLSK

PLLSO

PLLST

W/N

RSSI

NOISE

DET

R5V

33P

C103

15P

C11

2.2U

MB15A02PFV

IC1

0.001

C10

0.047

C12

33P

C13

10K

R10

HC18

HC16

33P

C108

33P

C109

PLL BOARD

470

R14

33P

0.047

C14

10 10V

33P

15P

C136

2.2u

L30

47K

R67

50K

R73

100K

R69

100K

R75

22K

R76

CR-626

4VCC

3OUT 2

GND

VCON

2SA1576

Q13

33P

C94

0.1

C95

33P

C131

33P

C133

C132

0.01

C128

2SC4215

Q18

TC75S54F

IC4

33P

C97

0.047

C91

0.1

C89

33P

C90

MA2S111

100K

R74

100K

R72

100K

R68

33P

C120

33P

C96

0.33

L28

3.3K

R80

DTC144EE

Q17

2SA1577

Q16

0.1

C124

33P

C121

33P

C125 220K

R35

10K

R34

0.1

C45

100K

R32

100

R37

220

R36

33P

C48

2SC4081

33P

C137

47K

R39

100K

R82

33P

C50

2SB1132 Q

33P

C46

NJM2904V

IC2B

33P

C47

27K

R33

1.8K

R30

100K

R27

56K

R28

C122

47K

R24

HC14

0.047

C40

33K

R29

470P

C44

33P

C49

NJM2904V

IC2A

33P

C42

3.3K

R31

470P

C41

100K

R26

33P

C43

R21

470P

C34

C33

33P

C37

R22

10K

R23

HSM88AS

C35

33P

C38

10K

R25

15P

C36

HSM88AS

(CHASSIS UNIT)

2.7K

R45 22

R83

R44

BLM21P300S

L25

R20

33P

C63

4.7

C57

4.7

C53

HC12

HC9

R46

33P

C67

T5V

BLM21P300S

L24

BLM21P300S

L26

33P

C52

MA2S111

L16

33P

C31

33P

C65

33P

C59

33P

C58

33P

C111

TMUT

BATT

33P

C32

UMD3

33P

C68

33P

C64

C134

33P

C77

2.7K

R79

4.7K

R50

R52

0.047

C74

R47

0.047

C114

33P

C76

470P

C71

1.2K

R49

4.7K

R48

33P

C70

33P

C73 33P

C69

6.8K

R64

33P

C81

3.9K

R55

HC15

1.8K

R65

470K

R87

1.2K

R86

33P

C84

33P

C82

15n

L22

0.01

C130

0.01

C129

0.33

L27

33P

C79

R66

2SC4228

Q12

NVCO-SM-838

IC3

820

R63

R59

1.5P

C83

33P

C85

270

R62

R61

270

R60

R58

6.8K

R15

1.2K

HC1

HC2

0.1

C17

TC7S66FU

IC2 45

321

DTC144EE

270

R16

2.7K

100

1.5

0.1

33P

C98

ERJ3GE-JPW

HW2

ERJ3GE-JPW

HC13

L23

1.8K

R13

4.7K

R12

HR2

100

2SC4081

2SA1576

150

1.5K

2.2K

3.3K

5.6K

12P

C16

18P

C15

HR1

10K

R101

0.1

C139

W/N

VCC

R5V

NOISE

RSSI

R5V

NAR

HC5

WIDE

DTC144EE

Q21

DTA144EE

Q19

DTA144EE

Q20

MA2S111

D10

XTAL

HC7

HC6

15K

R93

0.1

C28

HC2

HC3

CPV

VCOV

R5V

RF5V

NAR

10K

R77

XP4601

Q14

33P

C88

2.7K

R103

MA2S077

D15

MA2S077

D16

MA2S077

D14

MA2S077

D13

CFUM450F

FI5

R92

SFPC450E

FI4 21

SFPC450G

FI6 21

10K

R94 15K

R96

12n

L20

0.01

C135

22K

R95

0.1

C27

560

R54

12K

R91

R85

2.2K

R56

33P

C127

33P

C80

C78

2SC4228

Q11

R57

6.8K

R102

C117

3.9n

L29

2.2K

R78

4.7K

R51

R12

2SC3357

C75

R97

10n

L12

12n

L19

3.5P

C23

0.1

C29

39K

R53

3.5P

C24

33P

C22

2SC4228

Q10

MA78

33P

C72

33P

C25

C-TRIMM

HC20

UM9401F

D11

33n

L11

ERJ3GE-JPW

39n

L14

10P

C55

33P

C54

C62

2.5P

C66

6.8n

L17

270

8.2n

L15

470

R43

470

R41

R42

R10

270

R11

IC1

CP1

OUT

CP5

VCC2

CP3

VCC3

CP4

VCC1

CP2

2SC3357

ANT JACK

0.5P

C140

UM9401F

0.3P

DCS3220-09

L34

MA77

D2 c

HC17

8.8n

L1 8.8n

GLP-802-2

FI7

33P

C30

MA77

DCS3220-09

L13

560

R104

4.7K

10n

L32

15P

C138

33P

0.047

1.8K

EZFU860AM81T

FI1

33P

33K

180

18n

2SC5015

8.2n

L33

ERJ3GE-JPW

39n

68n

0.18u

L10

18P

C15

33P

C13

C11

33P

56K

560

EZFU860BM81T

FI2

3SK177 U72

HR1

10n

33P

C12

33P

C10

0.01

C1412P

C26

0.01

C18

470

R99

ERJ3GE-JPW

0.5P

C126

390

R98

33P

C16

0.01

C17

C19

FL-295

FI3

0.47U

0.01

C20

ERJ3GE-JPW

HW1 WIDE

0.001

C19

DTC144EE

33P

C26

HC8

IF BOARD

33P

C35

0.001

C24

0.01

C30

330

R22

0.001

C25

FIIN

FIOUT

IF5V

XTAL

NOISE

RSSI

IF5V

R5V

HC2

4.7

MA8056

2SC4081

4.7K

0.001

SQLC

DET

RF5C

0.047

0.1

C31

0.1

TK11360BM

IC2

3N.BYPASS

VIN 5

GND 4

VOUT

2GND

1CONT

TK11350BM

IC1

3N.BYPASS

VIN 5

GND 4

VOUT

2GND

1CONT

100K

R25

6.8K

R28

2.2K

R27

100

R16

6.8K

R12

HC1

0.001

C34

330K

R17

47K

R15

2.2K

R26

1.2K

R24

220P

C21

220P

C20 470K

R19

R18

100K

R14

47K

R13

UMG2

123

0.047

C33

NOISE

RSSI

0.1

C18

0.1

C29

1.5K

R23

HR1

TA31136FN

IC3

MIXIN 15

GND 14

N-REC 13

N-DET 12

RSSI 11

IFOUT 10

QUAD 9

AFOUT

8FILIN

7FILOUT

6DEC

5IFIN

4VCC

3MIXOUT

2OSCOUT

1OSCIN 0.56U

0.001

C23

330

CDBCA450CX24

0.001

C16

820P

C32

2.7K

2.2K

68P

C17

10K

R20

4.7

C15

0.01

C13

0.01

C14

18P

C10

0.01

C11

0.01

C12

180

MA2S728

2SK882 GR

100K

R21

0.01

IF AMP

LIMITER/SECOND MIXER/DETECTOR

SQUELCH

Squelch

Adjust

CPV REGULATOR

RF5V REGULATOR

VCOV

CRYSTAL

FILTER

FIRST

MIXER

BANDPASS

FILTER

RF AMP

BANDPASS

FILTER

RECEIVER

HARMONIC FILTER

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

Forward

Reverse

RF POWER MODULE

DRIVER

PREDRIVER

TRANSMITTER

ANTENNA

SWITCH

POWER CONTROL

Rx Freq Minus 45.225 MHz

TX/RX SWITCH

BUFFER

450 kHz CERAMIC BANDPASS FILTERS

VCO

CTRL

OUT

MOD

SYNTHESIZER

ACTIVE FILTER

VCO CONTROL

SYNTHESIZER

TA SWITCH

CHARGE PUMP

LOOP FILTER

LOGIC

UNIT

14.925 MHz TCXO

TRIPLER

44.775 MHz SECOND INJECTION

LOCK

DETECT

BUFFER

FREQ ADJ

MODULATION AMPLIFIER

TX SWITCH

RF BOARD SCHEMATIC

8-5

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

ACCESSORY

JACK

TO PTT BOARD

10 11

IC209

IC205

IC210

C304

C305

C303

C123

IC104

IC105

IC106

C401

D403

D311

R163

R335

C419

C36

C32

HC2

HC1

R332

R309

R308

R333

C55

C54

C216

C218

R239

IC206

IC203

IC204

C205

R211

Q405

IC306

Q406

C433

C444

C443

C450

C437

C436

D309

R167

PTT OUT

PTT IN

RX IN

RX OUT

EXTDC

OPTB

AMUTI

AMUTO

BEEPO

GND

TX OUT

TX IN

CLR/CODE

T5C

OP1

OP2

OP3

OP4

SW BATT

C418

R207

R215

R214

R213

C229

R254

R212

C207

R240

C209

R216

C16

R220

C210

R221

C211

R225

R244

R226

C45

R227

W12

C214

C226

R222

C208

R223

C44

C213

R224

C212

R243

C23

C15

C30

C31

C25

C24

C423 C422

D308

R323

R301

R249

R302

R232

R235

C215

R236

R231

C43

C219

C217

R238

R237

C435

C438

C439

C440

C449

C448

C447

C454

C430

C431

Q201

Q111

R320

D307

R329

R328

C22

C21

R325

R324

R322

HR1

W10

C137

C118

R127

C111

C138

R408

C402

D313

R337

D310

C113

C136

C142

R145

C139

C140

R132

R131

C121

C122

C141

C403

AUXB

MICE

GND

FCNB

GND

R241

C11

PTT

EXTMIC

TxD

RxD

LVcc

GND

PSW

RESET

AFO

To DC Power

Flex Circuit

R404

D401

D402

R403

R164

Q403

Q402

Q106

C144

D103

R148

C301

R303

R304

D301 R306

C306

C53

IC107

R140

R139

D102

D101

R141

C52

C17

IC102

R136

C127

R135

C124

R134

C125

C126

R137

C128

R133

C14

C12

C10

C409

C410

C411

C13

R402

R401 C143

R146

C110

R124

C116

R147

C145

R149

R118

R119

R120

C115

IC114

IC113

R159

C155

R158

C156

R157

R156

C153

R154

R153

IC112

C152

R152

C151

R155

C154

C150

R150

R151

C227

C225

R101

R250

R104

IC110

R102

R103

R106

R165

R107

C20

R228

C421

C412

C413

C415

C416

C48

C106

R108

C105

R109

C108

R142

C104

C101

C103

IC101

C102

C51

R105

R111

R110

C18

C107

IC303

R248

R406

R407

C414

C49

Q108

IC309

Q302

IC401

Q301 IC305

R338

R339

R168

R169

R125

C109

C134 C159

R113

R116

R112

HR2

IC304

C26

W11

R210

C224

C222

IC403

IC208

R143

R166

C130

C223

R245

R205 C203

IC202

R204

R253

C46

C432

R203

R206

C201

C202

R202

R201

R247

R246

C206

C228

C456

C406

C404

C405

C420

C408

C407

R326

D312

C29

C33

R315

R314

D302 C28 R316

D305

Q401

Q102 Q105

Q109

Q107

C157

C158

R317

R321

R330

R331

R170

R162

R161

Q104

IC115

Q112

D306

HD1

R318

C27

HC3

R311

C307

R310

R313

R312

R319

D104

R160

Q103

HC4

C19

IC103

Q101

C446

C441

C434

C451 Q110

IC201

R252

R251

IC402

Q404

R208

C204

SPE

L5V

MSO

MSCK

DISST

DISEN

KEYSO

KEYS1

KEYS2

KEYS3

KEYRO

KEYR1

KEYR2

KEYR3

TXLED

DSYLED

BATLED

BKLED

GND

MICE

MIC

GND

PWR

TMUT

T5V

LTR

MOD

+5V

ULOCK

GND

BATT

R5V

DET

NOISE

RSSI

W/N

PLLST

PLLSO

PLLSK

RF5C

GND

Vcc

GND

C129

R336

R117

D105

130

15 16

TO DISPLAY UNIT

TO RF UNIT

Channel Switch

On-Off Volume Control

LOGICBOARDTOPVIEW

LOGIC BOARD TOP VIEW

8-6

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

TX_IN

TX_OUT

SW_BATT

39K

R202

39K

R201

TC4W66FU

IC204

5876

4321

0.1

C206 0.1

C228

33PC450

33PC443

33PC435

33PC436

33PC434

33PC437

33PC451

5.6K

R166

18K

R143

100

R245

C204

MC33111D

IC208

1.8K

R246

33K

R207

33K

R339

22K

R338

C222

C223

R247

0.0047

C201

0.0047

C202

220K

R205

47K

R204

0.0047

C203

33P

C229

R213

5.6K

R211

56K

R208

R214

NJM2904V

IC202A

ERJ3GE-JPW

0.0047

C205

TX_IN

TX_OUT

NJM2904V

IC202B

0.1

C48

820

R215

0.0033

C210

3.3K

R222

39K

R220

470K

R216

+5V

TEST

56P

C212

0.0047

C213

0.047

C208

560P

C211

150K

R224

68K

R223 82K

R221

C209

NJM2904V

IC205A

0.1

C44

10K

R227

10K

R226

4.7K

R228 5.6K

R225

TC75S54F

IC201

0.1

C45 MSCK

C214

33P

10K

R244

NJM2904V

IC205B

SQLC

33P

C10 33P

33P

AXK520145P

1110

OP4CP204

OP3CP203

OP1

CP201 OP2CP202

0.1

C31

0.1

C30

BEEPO

AMUTO

AMUTI

RF5C

EXTDC

OPTB

RX_IN

RX_OUT

PTT_IN

PTT_OUT

T5C

CLR/CODE

33P

C13

33P

C14

BATT

33P

VCC

+5V

MOD

LTR

W/N

RSSI

ULOCK

PLLST

PLLSK

PLLSO

100K

R407

200K

R406

AXK5S30245P

16 15

0.22

C414

33P

C12

33PC20

33PC11

33PC25

33PC23

33PC15

33P

33PC24

T5V

PWR

NOISE

0.1

C49

TMUTDET

R5V

BATIN

0.1

C225

ERJ3GE-JPW

W1268K

R241

TC4W53FU

IC210

4.7

C226

C227

10K

R249

50k

AD8403

IC209

MSO

+5S

10K

R243

DPOTST

R5C

TC4W53FU

IC203

MC33172D

IC206B

10K

R240

0.0022

C218

330K

R239

+5L

VOL_IN

47K

R238

MC33172D

IC206A

DTC144EE

Q201

+5S

BWC

DTMF

L5V

47K

R237

0.1

C43

0.0033

C217

0.1

C219

47K

R170

27K

R232

C134

TC7S66FU

IC103

321

100K

R236

0.01

C26

RXDATA

100K

R302

470K

R301

100K

R235

0.01

C216

0.01

C215 27K

R231

0.1

C108

+5V

10K

R142

S-81230SG

IC403

5NC

4NC 3

VOUT

VIN

GND

470K

R210

C130

+5L

C456

DTMFMT

+5S

L5V

DTMF

MMUTE

RMUTE

100K

R333

C224

220K

R254

1.2M

R212

2.2K

R253

C46

2.7K

R206

0.01

C16

33P

C444

33P

C433

2.7K

R203

33P

C432

CP11

CP10

CP9

CP8

CP7

CP6

CP5

CP4

CP3

CP2

CP1

MIC

MICE

BKLED

BATLED

BSYLED

TXLED

KEYR3

KEYR2

KEYR1

BSYLED

+5L +5L

MSCK

MSO

L5V

MSO

MSCK

CP26

CP25

CP24

CP23

CP22

CP21

CP20

CP19

CP18

CP17

CP16

CP15

CP14

CP13

CP12

SPE

KEYR0

KEYS3

KEYS2

KEYS1

KEYS0

DISEN

DISST

NPSPAC

SQLC

100K

R332

MSCK

L5V

R5C

BEEP

T5C

TMUT

ULOCK

PLLST

0.01

C55

0.1

C54

10K

R112

560K

R116

HR2

47K

R113

0.01

C159

0.1

C207

0.01

C109

100K

R328

100K

R329

DTC144EE

Q101

OFFREQI

QSEL0I

DTMFCK

FCN

AUX

0.01

C19

DTMFSO

TXD

OFFRQ 3.579MHz

CR-563

10K

R308

10K

R309

X25128

IC304

VCC 15

HOLD 14

NC 13

NC 12

NC 11

NC 10

SCK 9

8VSS

7WP

6NC

5NC

4NC

3NC

2SO

1CS

0.1

C421

T5C

S5C

PCD3312CT

IC303

SDA 7

SCL 6

A0 5

TONE

4OSCO

3OSCI

2VDD

1VSS

0.01

C18

+5V

RF5C 0.001

C422

0.001

C416

R5V

T5V

+5S

4.7

C412

UMD6

Q406

UMD6

Q405

UMD6

Q404

4.7

C423

4.7

C415

0.001

C418

33P

C413

0.001

C410

33P

C411

4.7

C409

6.8K

R250

10K

R252

12K

R251

BATT

2SJ316

Q403

VCC

TXDATA

LVCC

0.1

C420

33P

C406

0.001

C405

4.7

C404 100K

R403

MA2S111

D401

TK11250BM

IC402

N.BYPASS

6VIN

5GND

4VOUT

GND

CONT

TK11250BM

IC401

3N.BYPASS

VIN 5

GND 4

VOUT

2GND

1CONT

2SJ316Q402

R408

2SC4081

Q401

MA2S111

D402

18K

R401

MA8039

D403

ERJ3GE-JPW

HR1

15P

C303 18P

C304

9.8304MHz

CR-635

ERJ3GE-JPW

W10

10K

R402

T5V

PSW

S-80842ALNP

IC305

4VSS

3NC 2

VDD

OUT

0.1

C301

33P

C401

C403

100K

R404

100K

R310

33P

C408

4.7

C407

0.01

C22

0.1

C21

18K

R303

27P

C305 MA2S077

D301

R306

0.1

C306

12K

R304

10K

R312

HC3

2SC4081

Q301

100K

R330

CSHIFT

10K

R248

MD1

NMI

100K

R322

L5V

0.22

C307

R311

100K

R321

MA2S111

D302

220K

R314

220K

R315

470K

R313

RESET

RXD

HD6432144FA20

IC306

P15/A5 73

P16/A6 72

P17/A7 71

VSS 70

VSS 69

PB4/D4 68

PB5/D5 67

P20/A8 66

P21/A9 65

P22/A10 64

P23/A11 63

P24/A12 62

P25/A13 61

P26/A14 60

P27/A15 59

VCC 58

PB6/D6 57

PB7/D7 56

P47/PWX1 55

P46/PWX0 54

P45/TMRI1 53

P44/TMO1 52

P43/TMCI1 51

P42/TMRIO/SCK2

25 ADTRG/IRQ2/LWR

24 IRQ1/P91

23 IRQ0/P92

22 RD/P93

21 KIN12/CIN12/A20

20 KIN13/CIN13/A21

19 HWR/P94

18 IOS/AS/P95

17 EXCL/P96

16 WAIT/P97

15 VSS

14 TXD0/P50

13 RXD0/P51

12 SCK0/P52

11 KIN14/CIN14/A22

10 KIN15/CIN15/A23

9VCC

8STBY

7NMI

6MD0

5MD1

4FWE

3EXTAL

2XTAL

P14/A4

1RES

OFFRQ

0.047

C308

TC7S04FU

IC115

100K

R331

ERJ3GE-JPW

PTTIN

PTT_IN

PTT_OUT

W/N

PLLSO

PLLSK

DISST

DISEN

KEYS3

KEYS2

KEYS1

MA2S111

D309

33PC447

33PC448

33PC449

33P

C446

CP27

33P

C431

33P

C454

33PC438

33PC439

33PC440

33PC441

33PC430

FCNB

MICE

AUXB

PTT

EXTMIC

ERJ3GE-JPW

W11

33P

C28

TXD

MA8056

D313

470

R337

MA2S111

D310

33P

C27

33P

C33

33P

C32

EXTMIC

PTT

FCNB

AUXB

MICE

GND

470

R323

470

R320

470

R318

52207-0590

TXD

XTXD

2.2K

R147

C145

100K

R319

ERJ3GE-JPW

100K

R324

100K

R317

MA8056

D307

MA8056

D308

FCN

AUX

MA8056

D306

MA8056

D305

KEYS0

47K

R169

2.7

R131

0.01

C142

2.7

R132

0.1

C121

C141

EC10SP16-51

TC7W32FU

IC309

SBATLED

OPTB

CLR/CODE

PTTIN S

33P

C144

BBKLED

XTXD

XRXD

C123

0.1

C122

UMG2

Q112

MC33172D

IC107A

SN_RX

BWC

+5S

T5V

RXDATA

PSW

DTC144EE

Q108

DTC144EE

Q104

MC33172D

IC114A

C158

MC33172D

IC113A

3QSEL0I

33K

R162

33K

R161

C157

MA2S111

D104

15K

R160

MA2S111

D105

MC33172D

IC114B

22K

R159

22K

R156

0.0033

C126

MC33172D

IC113B

MC33172D

IC112B

0.0068

C156

0.022

C155

0.0022

C154

0.047

C153

15K

R158

R157

20K

R155

3.3K

R154

MA2S111

D102

MC33172D

IC112A

MA2S111

D101

100K

R140 560K

R139

330K

R137

DTC144EE

Q103

100K

R141

MC33172D

IC102B

4.7

C129

0.0022

C128

33K

R153

+5V

MC33172D

IC102A

HC4 0.01

C17

TC4W53FU

IC110

DET

SN_RX

SN_TR

+5S

0.01

C152

10K

R152

R151

R150

0.01

C124

47K

R136

100K

R133 47K

R135

0.01

C125

100K

R134

100K

R102

56K

R167

DTC144EE

Q111

NPSPAC

150K

R101

47K

R165

UMG2

Q110

W/N

0.01

C101

+5S

BATT

LVCC

R5V

RX_IN

RX_OUT

ERJ3GE-JPW

0.1

C52

470P

C102

0.001

C103

150K

R110

560K

R108

5.6K

R109

0.01

C105

0.039

C104

390K

R106

0.1

C51

MC33172D

IC101A

0.1

C127

0.01

C106

0.1

C53

120K

R105

MC33172D

IC107B

100K

R111

C107

27K

R107

47K

R104

47K

R103

2.7K

R168

10K

RV-283

R117

R125

0.1

C136

2.2K

R163

HC2

HC1

MC33172D

IC101B

33P

C113

33P

C419

1.2

R148

100K

R164

DTC144EE

Q109

4.7

C111

2.7

R127

10K

R145

MA2S111

D103

2SB798

Q106

4.7

C138

C139

C137

4.7u

C140

TDA7233D

IC104

8+INPUT

7-INPUT

6SVR

5OUTPUT 4

+VS 3

GND 2

MUTE 1

GND

TDA7233D

IC105

8+INPUT

7-INPUT

6SVR

5OUTPUT 4

+VS 3

GND 2

MUTE 1

GND

TDA7233D

IC106

8+INPUT

7-INPUT

6SVR

5OUTPUT 4

+VS 3

GND 2

MUTE 1

GND

0.1

C118

RXD

XRXD

C143

2SA1576

Q102

C115

0.047

C116

100K

R146

DTC144EE

Q105

MA8056

D311

6.8K

R119

6.8K

R118

10K

R149

2SC4081

Q107

L5V

PSW

0.047

C110

100K

R326

100K

R325

AFO

LVCC

BATT

MD1

10K

R124

RESET

100K

R120

TXD

RXD

LVCC

GND

PSW

RESET

AFO

HD1

470

R316

470

R335

DTC144EE

Q302 MA8160

D312

R336

RXD

PSW

52396-0990

RESET

LVCC

GND

AFO

33P

C402

33P

C29

JACK BOARD

PTT BOARD

33P

C36

(CHASSIS UNIT)

UNIT

CHASSIS

BANDPASS FILTER (300-3000 Hz)

On-Off/

Volume

Switch

LEVEL ADJ

RECEIVE AUDIO PROCESSING

RECEIVE DATA PROCESSING

LOW PASS FILTER

DC RESTORATION

Wideband = Low

AUDIO AMP

CHANNEL SEL SW

SUPPLY SWITCHING

AMP SELECT

IC306

MICROPROCESSOR

RESET

CLOCK

SHIFT

DTMF ENCODER

+5L REGULATOR

LVCC

VCC

+5V REGULATOR

+5S SW

T5C SW

R5C SW

16k x 8 EEPROM

DTMF

MUTE

DISPLAY

BOARD

MIC/DTMF MUTE

COMPANDER

3V REGULATOR

AUDIO

MUTE

Rx Audio

TX AUDIO PROCESSING

TX DATA PROCESSING

HIGHPASS FILTER

LIMITER

SPLATTER FILTER

DIGITAL

POT (4)

SN/

DATA

SEL

FILTER

BYPASS

L = TEST

UNIT

OPTION

COMBINER

H = Tx

SMARTNETTX/RX DATA PROCESSING

DC RESTORATION

TX/RX SW BANDPASS FILTER

BATTERY

Top on

Radio

LOGIC BOARD SCHEMATIC

8-7

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

R9 C4

C7 HR2

HR3

R18

HR1

Q2 Q4

IC1

GND

SPE

L5V

DISSO

DISSK

DISST

DISEN

KEYS0

KEYS1

KEYS2

KEYS3

KEYR0

KEYR1

KEYR2

KEYR3

TXLED

BSYLED

BATLED

BKLED

GND

MICE

MIC

GND

C1 R2

R13 R11

R14

R12

R16

R15

R17

DS3 DS4 DS5

DS1

DS2

DS6

Tx LED Busy LED Batt LED

GND

KEYR3

KEYR2

KEYR1

KEYR0

KEYS3

KEYS2

KEYS1

KEYS0

GND

MIC

MICE

GND

BKLED

L5V

GND

SPE

DS7

DS8

DISPLAY BOARD TOP VIEWDISPLAY BOARD BOTTOM VIEW

8-8

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND COMPONENT LAYOUTS

8-9 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

52204-2990

1987654321

KEYR3

KEYR2

KEYR1

KEYR0

KEYS3

KEYS2

KEYS1

KEYS0

GND

AXN820735

20 19

18 17

16 15

14 13

12 11

10 9

8 7

6 5

4 3

2 1

BKLED

SPE

GND

+5L

GND

MICE

MIC

680P

47K

100K

SPE

CP2

CP1

33P

0.047

LNJ310M6URA

DS2

LNJ310M6URA

DS1

150

R17

LNJ310M6URA

DS8

LNJ310M6URA

DS7

HR3

HR2

HR1

47K

0.1

LC75834W

IC1

47 CL

46 CE

45 INH

44 OSC

43 VSS

42 VLCD2

41 VLCD1

40 VLCD

39 VDD

38 COM4

S23 22

S22 21

S21 20

S20 19

S19 18

S18 17

S17 16

S16 15

S15 14

S14

48 DI

37 COM3

S24

S13

S21

S20

S22

S23

S24

S13

S14

S15

S16

S17

S18

S19

0.1

12K

R18

3.3K

SEC1801C

DS5

SEC1401C

DS4

10K

2SA1576 S

SEC1601C

DS3

TX LED

R12

2SA1576

47K

R11

47K

R13

BUSY LED

R14

47K

R15

820

R16

2SA1576

BATTERY

LD-BU10394J

DS6

33P

C5 1

DISPLAY BOARD SCHEMATIC

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND COMPONENT LAYOUTS

8-10

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

DS1

DS3

DS4

DS2

(PHON) 2

(STR) 3

(HOME) SYS

(RCL)

GRP

(CLR)

(S.A/D) 89

SCAN

(SND)

( )

HC5

HC6

HC7

HC8

19 Q1

HC11

HC12

HC10

HC9

SPE

GND

L5V

BKLED

GND

MICE

MIC

HC2 R3 R5 HC4

HC3

R12

R11

R10 R2 HC1

GND

KEYS0

KEYS1

KEYS2

KEYS3

KEYR0

KEYR1

KEYR2

KEYR3

GND

SPEAKER

MICROPHONE

10-KEY BOARD FRONT VIEW

10-KEY BOARD BACK VIEW

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND COMPONENT LAYOUTS

8-11 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

AXN720535

HC10

HC9

HC12

HC11

120

R10

LN1371G-(TR)

DS1

LN1371G-(TR)

DS2

LN1371G-(TR)

DS3

LN1371G-(TR)

DS4

120

R11

33P

S15

HC4

HC3

#S12

9S9

10K

R12

HC2

0S11

8S8

2SA1576

HC8

HC1

S10

7S7

HC6

HC7

HC5

4S4

1S1

5S5

2S2

6S6

3S3

S14

S13

100K

33P

100K

33P

33K

SP1

MC1

Microphone

Speaker

10-KEY BOARD SCHEMATIC

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND COMPONENT LAYOUTS

8-12

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

SPEAKER

MICROPHONE

HC8

HC7

HC6

HC5

HC1

HC4

HC3

HC2

20 2

DS1

DS2

SCAN A/D

( ) MENU

3-KEY BOARD FRONT VIEW

3-KEY BOARD BACK VIEW

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND COMPONENT LAYOUTS

8-13 November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

AXN720535

LN1371G-(TR)

DS1

LN1371G-(TR)

DS2

220

R6 33P

10K

2SA1576

HC8

HC7

HC6

HC5

HC1

HC2

HC3

S2 S3

HC4

100K

33P

100K

33P

33K

SP1

MC1

F1 F2 F3

Microphone

Speaker

3-KEY BOARD SCHEMATIC

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND COMPONENT LAYOUTS

8-14

November 1999

Part No. 001-7780-500

NOTES

Part No. 001-7780-500

11-99hph Printed in U.S.A.

Efjohnson Smartzone 7780 Users Manual Book.bk

EFJohnson Radio FM Portable Radio Intrinsically-Safe SMARTNET, SmartZone Conventional 001-7780-500_7780Series_ServiceManual

7780 to the manual 5ce12480-cf06-491b-8427-3eef45a21ab8

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation